What did The Warehouse Group Limited announce?
The Warehouse Group Limited (NZX: WHS) filed “The Warehouse Group FY26 Annual Results” with NZX on 29 September 2026, as a full year results announcement.
From the announcement:“While the Board is pleased with the progress made, materially improving profitability remains our primary ambition." 1 FY25 was a 53-week financial year ending 3 August 2025, compared to 52 weeks in FY26.”
- Which company?
- The Warehouse Group Limited (NZX: WHS)
- When was it filed?
- 29 September 2026
- Where is the original?
- NZX announcement
The Warehouse Group FY26 Annual Results
1
NZX | Media release – 30 September 2026
The Warehouse Group reports strong profit growth in FY26
Summary for the 52 weeks ended 2 August 2026:
• Reported sales were $3.0 billion, down 1.9% on a 53-week FY25, up 0.4% on a
comparative 52-week same-store basis
1
• Group gross profit margin up 40 basis points to 32.6%
• Cost of doing business reduced by $29.8 million to 31.8% of sales, an improvement
of 40 basis points
• Operating profit
2
(EBIT pre-NZ-IFRS 16) increased to $22.6 million from $1.3 million
in FY25
• Reported net profit after tax increased to $11.2 million from $2.8 million net loss after
tax in FY25
• Operating cash flow improved by $121.2 million to $193.5 million, capital expenditure
increased to $21.1 million from $12.4 million in FY25 with investment primarily
directed to stores
• Net debt reduced to $17.0 million from $96.1 million in FY25
• No final dividend has been declared for FY26
The Warehouse Group today announced a strong recovery in profitability, with comparable
store sales holding broadly steady despite continued pressure on discretionary spending.
Gross margin improved and costs reduced as a proportion of sales, while stronger cash flow
supported increased investment in store upgrades and foundations for future growth.
Chair John Journee said the result demonstrates that the actions taken to date are delivering
results.
"Despite a difficult retail environment, The Warehouse Group made meaningful progress
during the year. Sales were steady on a comparable basis, profitability improved, and the
business finished the year in a much stronger position.
“Importantly, this progress was driven by actions taken within the business rather than an
improvement in market conditions, creating a stronger foundation for the next stage of our
recovery. While the Board is pleased with the progress made, materially improving
profitability remains our primary ambition."
1
FY25 was a 53-week financial year ending 3 August 2025, compared to 52 weeks in FY26. Same-store sales
removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of
stores during the reported and comparable year.
2
Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP
measure.
2
Group sales were $3.0 billion, down 1.9% on the prior year which included an additional
week of trading. Sales increased 0.4% on a comparative 52-week same-store basis.
Consumer confidence fluctuated throughout the year. Confidence improved through the first
half as interest rates eased, signalling a possible recovery. However, international conflict,
higher fuel prices and renewed pressure on household budgets weighed on consumer
sentiment later in the year. Customers remained value conscious with average selling prices
down 1.4%. Across the brands, customers spent more per visit and purchased more items,
with average basket value up 0.5% and units sold up 1.8%.
Group gross profit margin increased 40 basis points to 32.6%, while cost of doing business
reduced 40 basis points to 31.8% of sales. It was the first year since FY21 that gross margin
improved while costs reduced as a percentage of sales.
Margin growth was supported by stronger buying and retailing discipline, improved ranges,
tighter inventory management and a higher proportion of full-price sales. Combined with
sustained cost discipline, this delivered an operating profit of $22.6 million, up from $1.3
million in the prior year. Margin recovery accelerated through the second half across all three
brands.
Group Chief Executive Officer Mark Stirton said, "This result shows that the internal changes
we're making are starting to get traction. Warehouse Stationery and Noel Leeming delivered
strong profit growth, and The Warehouse finished the year in much better shape than it
started.
"Our teams have worked incredibly hard through another year of significant change. We're
buying better, managing inventory more effectively, improving our ranges and pricing, and
running the business with greater discipline. At the same time, we're investing again in
stores, the brand, customer experience and growth. We've made a good start, but our
ambitions are much bigger, especially for The Warehouse where we’re determined to earn
back our place as New Zealanders' first choice retailer."
Store development
The Group balanced cost reductions with selective investments in retail experience
upgrades that support customers and growth. Capital expenditure increased to $21.1 million
from $12.4 million in the prior year.
The Warehouse stores are receiving upgrades to lighting, flooring and racking, alongside
new displays and visual merchandising in homewares, apparel and beauty.
In FY26 the Group returned to expanding its store footprint. Warehouse Stationery opened in
Wellington Central and Noel Leeming relocated its Palmerston North store. Since August
2026, Warehouse Stationery has opened in Whitianga and Noel Leeming has opened its
Auckland Central flagship store. In late 2027, the Group will open The Warehouse and Noel
Leeming stores in Mangawhai.
“We are investing selectively in better presentation, more relevant and exciting stores, and
new locations because we can see opportunities to grow all of our brands and serve more
customers," said Mark Stirton.
3
Brand performance
The Warehouse
The Warehouse made progress during the year, particularly in the second half. Sales were
$1,774.9 million, down 2.3% on the reported 53-week FY25. Sales increased 0.6% on a
comparative 52-week same-store basis. Online sales represented 4.4% of sales, compared
with 4.6% in FY25, and actions to improve the profitability of online sales resulted in
meaningfully stronger operating margins versus the prior year.
Gross profit margin was 20 basis points below FY25 but recovered through the second half,
with fourth-quarter margin finishing strongly ahead of the prior year. After the allocation of
support office costs, the brand reported an operating loss of $7.5 million, an improvement of
$4.7 million on the prior year's operating loss of $12.2 million.
“At The Warehouse, we are improving the style, quality and presentation of our ranges,
particularly in homewares and apparel. These categories represent 50% of revenue and
were key contributors to the brand’s improved second-half margin performance, with more
apparel sold at full price during the year and margins improved across homewares,” said
Mark Stirton.
Beauty sales increased 5.2% on a comparable 52-week basis as customers responded to
broader ranges and improved in-store presentation. The Warehouse remained New
Zealand's preferred toy retailer for a second consecutive year, with record toy sales. The
Warehouse simplified its grocery range to pantry staples and everyday essentials, resulting
in improved category performance.
“Grocery is an important reason customers choose to shop with us regularly. Rather than
expanding the range, we’re concentrating on the staples customers buy most often and
where we can offer the best value, like bread, eggs, coffee and olive oil. A simpler range
allows us to deliver lower prices and a more reliable top-up shop for our customers.”
“This year, we undertook an extensive review of our customer segments, providing valuable
insights into what matters most and how best to reach them. Our new brand platform, This Is
Warehouse Country, marks the next phase for The Warehouse, building on what New
Zealanders have loved since 1982 while refreshing the offer and experience for modern
families.”
Warehouse Stationery
Warehouse Stationery delivered a strong result, returning to sales growth and nearly
doubling operating profit.
Sales increased 0.7% to $227.6 million against a 53-week FY25, while 52-week same-store
sales increased 2.0%. Online sales represented 7.1% of sales, broadly in line with the prior
year. Operating profit increased to $15.9 million from $8.2 million in the prior year.
Disciplined pricing and stock management supported gross profit growth across every
category, with margin strengthening through the second half.
Growth was supported by strong performances across Warehouse Stationery’s key
categories. Print & Create sales increased 13.8% on a comparable 52-week basis, Art &
Craft sales increased 6.7%, and Office Furniture sales increased 5.5%.
4
“Warehouse Stationery’s result shows there is still significant growth opportunity in a well-
established brand. We are serving more schools, strengthening our position with small
businesses and seeing strong demand across creative categories, while operating the
business more effectively,” said Mark Stirton.
Noel Leeming
Noel Leeming made the largest contribution to the Group's earnings recovery.
Sales were $1,017.4 million, down 2.0% on the reported 53-week FY25. On a comparable
52-week basis, same-store sales were down 0.5% while total sales (including on-line)
decreased 0.2%. Online sales increased to 13.1% of sales from 11.3% in the prior year.
Noel Leeming maintained pricing discipline in a highly competitive market and delivered
margin growth across both halves. Operating profit increased to $21.8 million from $11.7
million in the prior year.
Appliances delivered the strongest growth during the year, with sales increasing 11.2% on a
52-week basis, led by whiteware and small appliances. Cellular sales increased 4.7% and
Computers & Storage increased 10.6%, supported by new brands and customer demand
linked to the Windows 10 and 3G transitions. Services, including delivery, installation and
Tech Solutions, grew 10.1% during the year.
“In an extremely competitive market, Noel Leeming remained disciplined and responsive to
pricing and promotional activity, while still delivering a strong result. Looking ahead, we see
opportunities to grow market share through an expanded store and product offer as New
Zealand’s leading locally owned technology and appliances retailer,” said Mark Stirton.
Balance sheet
Buying and planning improved progressively in priority categories over the year, reducing
inventory to $438.8 million from $476.7 million and aged inventory to 21.8% from 23.1%.
Stock turn increased to 4.7 times from 4.6 times. Lower inventory levels and improved stock
movement supported stronger working capital performance and cash generation.
The Group generated free cash flow of $79.4 million, compared with an outflow of $45.2
million in the prior year. Net debt reduced by $79.1 million to $17.0 million.
Dividend
No final dividend has been declared for FY26. The Board's immediate priority is to rebuild
sustainable earnings while retaining financial flexibility.
Outlook
Sales in the first eight weeks of FY27 were broadly in line with the prior year, while margin
performance was ahead of the prior comparable period.
“With consumer confidence and economic growth subdued, retail conditions are expected to
remain challenging. We can't control those factors, so we're concentrating on improving the
areas within our control and delivering a better result regardless of market conditions.
5
“Improving performance at The Warehouse remains the Group's biggest priority. We will
achieve that by delivering better value and a better customer experience through more
relevant ranges, better pricing, better stock management and lower costs,” said Mark Stirton.
Ends
For media queries please contact: For investor queries please contact:
Lizzie Havercroft
General Manager Corporate Affairs
+64 27 507 0613
lizzie.havercroft@twgroup.co.nz
Mark O’Malley
Head of Strategy
+64 27 301 5936
mark.omalley@twgroup.co.nz
The Warehouse Group Limited
26 The Warehouse Way, Northcote, Auckland 0627
---
2026
Annual Results
52 WEEKS ENDING 2 AUGUST 2026
1
2
Contents
1.Chair Update - John Journee
2.CEO Update - Mark Stirton
3.Financial Performance - Stefan Knight
4.The Year Ahead - Mark Stirton
5.Thank You - John Journee
6.Appendix - Additional Information
2
3
Chair Update
John Journee
Chair
The Board’s perspective
●FY26 was the first full year under the brand-led operating model and demonstrated that the reset could deliver in a difficult consumer environment. Operating
profit recovered to $22.6m from $1.3m, driven by actions within the business rather than an improvement in market conditions
●Gross margin increased while the cost of doing business reduced, rebuilding operating leverage. Strong cash generation enabled the Group to reduce net debt by
$79.1m while increasing investment in its store network
●Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery delivered stronger returns. The Warehouse also improved, but remains below an acceptable level of profitability, and its
recovery is the Group’s most important priority
●No final dividend has been declared for FY26. The Board’s immediate priority is to rebuild sustainable earnings while retaining financial flexibility. The Board
recognises the importance of dividends to shareholders and remains committed to returning to paying dividends in the future
4
Progress against the reset plan
CHAIR UPDATE
$3,027.6m
32.6%31.8%$22.6m$79.4m$17.0m
(1.9%) on a 53-week FY25
(0.2%) on a comparable 52 week
1
+0.4% same store sales
2
+40 bps on FY25
6
-40 bps on FY25
6
vs $1.3m in FY25vs ($45.2m) in FY25from $96.1m in FY25
GROUP SALESGROSS MARGINCODB
3
OPERATING PROFIT
4
FREE CASH FLOW
5
NET DEBT
1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53rd week of FY25
2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year
3.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure
4.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT, refer to Slide 31 of this presentation and Note 2.0 of the financial statements
5.Free cash flow is calculated as Operating cash flow less capital expenditure and lease principal payments
6.Basis point movements are based on percentages rounded to the nearest 10bps and are so throughout the presentation
5
CEO Update
Mark Stirton
Group CEO
Consumer confidence improved through the first half of FY26 before falling due to international conflict and recovered towards the end of the financial
year. Despite the weaker environment, Group earnings improved
6
The market we traded through
MACROECONOMIC CONTEXT
C O N S U M E R C O N F I D E N C E T H R O U G H F Y 2 6 · A N Z-R O Y M O R G A N , M O N T H L Y
What it meant for our customers
●Higher prices put further pressure on household budgets and
discretionary spending
●Real incomes declined, unemployment increased, and the first
OCR increase in three years added further pressure late in the year
●Customers shopped less often and focused more on value
●Customers bought more items, but at slightly lower average prices
●Lower foot traffic was partly offset by larger baskets and broadly
stable conversion
5.6%4.1%
Highest since
September 2015
Two-year high,
June qtr
UNEMPLOYMENT
1
INFLATION
1
+1.7%
Growth remains
subdued
ANNUAL GDP GROWTH
1
G R O U P M E T R I C S
2
F Y 2 6 V F Y 2 5
+1.8%
UNITS
-1.4%
ASP
-0.2%
FOOT TRAFFIC
+0.5%
BASKET SIZE
1.Source:https://www.stats.govt.nz (unemployment; June 2026 update, inflation; annual as at June quarter, GDP growth; annual as at June quarter)
2.Group metrics shown have all been calculated on a 52-week same store sales basis, which removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during
the reported and comparable year
Margin and cost discipline lifted earnings, while inventory management improved cash conversion
7
FY26 began to restore operating leverage and strengthened the balance sheet
GROUP PERFORMANCE
1.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT, refer to Slide 31 of this
presentation and Note 2.0 of the financial statements.
2.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure
3.Free cash flow is calculated as Operating cash flow less capital expenditure and lease principal payments
4.Basis point movements are based on percentages rounded to the nearest 10bps and are so throughout the presentation
P R O F I T R E C O V E R YO P E R A T I N G L E V E R A G EB A L A N C E S H E E T
$22.6m
32.6%31.8%
GROSS MARGINCODB / SALES
OPERATING PROFIT
+$21.3m
year-on-year improvement
Profit improved on broadly flat
comparable sales
+40 bps
4
Margin and cost as % of sales
improved together
FIRST TIME SINCE FY21
-40 bps
4
The two levers are rebuilding
operating leverage
$79.4m$17.0m
FREE CASH FLOWNET DEBT
Net debt reduced by $79.1m
Cash conversion strengthened
financial flexibility and supported
investment in-store
Lower inventory supported the
improvement
The financial platform is now more resilient, yet profitability still sits well below our ambitions
8
How we went against what we said we would do
1
GROUP PERFORMANCE
1.As set out in the FY25 Annual Results investor presentation — Looking ahead.
2.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure
MET
Overhead reductions
PARTIALLY MET
Gross margin recovery
NOT MET
The Warehouse margin recovery
MET
Working capital unlocks
MET
Disciplined capital investment
MET
Retail-led strategy
$29.8m CODB
2
reduction; support office costs down 8.8%
Group margin increased 40bps, led by the second half. Two out of three brands showed full year growth
Exited Q4 ahead, but full-year margin remained below FY25 with deeper clearance of aged inventory
$22.9m working-capital inflow; inventory down $37.9m
$21.1m in capital expenditure, reweighted toward stores and supply chain
Retail-led strategy and execution priorities are set and in action
9
Rebuilding retail fundamentals
RETAIL FUNDAMENTALS
1.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year
In FY26 we strengthened how we choose product, move it through the network and convert customer demand, with early evidence visible in
lower inventory, better gross margin and store execution. However, we recognise there is further work to be done.
PLAN & BUYMOVESELL
Better sell-through, margin discipline
and inventory productivity in key
departments
Getting product to customers at lower costStores, brand and conversion
CAPABILITIES BUILT
Grocery simplified as a value-led top-up offer
supporting broader shopping missions
Buying and planning reset for all three brands,
with stricter stock investment criteria
Ranges, price points and sourcing
strengthened in priority categories while
ensuring we maintain value on key items
CAPABILITIES BUILT
Dedicated supply chain leadership and a new
freight partner with improved capabilities
Independent review of integrated supply chain
highlighting opportunities, several changes
now underway
Streamlined online distribution to improve
service to customers, partnered with DoorDash
and reduced cost to serve online
CAPABILITIES BUILT
This Is Warehouse Country refreshed the
brand platform
Store investment across all three brands and
visual merchandising uplift
New formats developed to broaden
customer appeal
FUTURE
UNLOCKS
AN EARLY EVIDENCE POINT
−$37.9m
GROUP INVENTORY
Lower cost to serve, faster flow,
improved availability and a
scalable network
FUTURE
UNLOCKS
AN EARLY EVIDENCE POINT
4.7x
GROUP STOCK TURN
(FY25: 4.6x)
Improving foot-traffic, higher
conversion, stronger baskets and
better store economics
FUTURE
UNLOCKS
AN EARLY EVIDENCE POINT
+0.4%
GROUP SAME-STORE
SALES
1
What we sell and what it costs
10
Focus is moving from flat sales to sustainable revenue growth
REVENUE GROWTH
FY26 comparable sales were broadly flat. Our focus is to turn stronger retail fundamentals into sustainable revenue growth and gain back share.
BRAND-LED GROWTH
Clear routes to growth for each brand
THE WAREHOUSEWAREHOUSE STATIONERYNOEL LEEMING
Leverage brand platform and
reappraisal to drive foot-traffic
Strengthen product relevance,
ranges and value
Invest in stores and build local
relevance based on customer
segmentation
Grow business & education
Expand Print & Create,
personalisation and services
Reach more customers through
new formats, new stores and
improved online channels
Win share in priority categories
and younger customer groups
Differentiate through expert
service and solutions
Grow national store network, roll-
out interactive store concepts and
accelerate online
Focus on growth categories,
including Health & Beauty
11
People, communities and environment
ESG
FY26 progress across our team, communities and environmental impact
$1.9m
contributed to New Zealand
charities and communities
Award Winner
The Good Drop won the Spark Retail NZ
2026 Awards KNAPP Sustainability
Leadership Award
90%
of electricity matched with electricity
produced by Lodestone Energy's solar
farms (FY25: 63%)
74%
Scope 1 and 2 market-based
emissions change compared to
FY23 base year (FY25: 45%)
28.3
Per million hours
worked (FY25: 30.2)
25 eNPS
1
Group eNPS (FY25: 36)
284
Post consumer waste collected
for reuse or recycling
79%
of operational waste diverted
from landfill (FY25: 79%)
492
Tier 1 factory ethical
assessments completed in
FY26
reduction
tonnes
EMISSIONSTRIFR
(Total recorded injury frequency rate)
TEAM ENGAGEMENT
CIRCULARITYOPERATIONAL WASTEETHICAL SOURCING
1.eNPS (employee Net Promoter Score) in FY25 excludes DC team members as these were not surveyed in FY25
12
13
Financial
Performance
Stefan Knight
Group CFO
Operating profit improved by $21.3m on broadly flat comparable sales, as higher gross margin and lower operating costs rebuilt operating leverage
FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53
rd
week of FY25
2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year
3.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT, refer to Slide 31 of this presentation
and Note 2.0 of the financial statements
4.Adjusted NPAT is before continuing operations before unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Adjusted and Statutory NPAT, refer to slide 31
5.Reported NPAT is attributable to shareholders and is adjusted for minority interests
Year in Review
•Operating profit increased to $22.6m from $1.3m,
driven by improved margin and cost discipline in a
challenging consumer environment
•Gross margin increased 40bps to 32.6%, with a
90bps second-half improvement led by
Warehouse Stationery and Noel Leeming and
supported by The Warehouse’s recovery in Q4
•Cost of doing business reduced by $29.8m, or 3.0%,
and improved 40bps to 31.8% of sales, led by lower
support office, IT and depreciation costs
•Both levers, margin and cost, moved the right way
in the same year — the first time since FY21
•The seasonal second-half loss narrowed to $4.3m
from $18.2m, contributing $13.9m of the Group’s
$21.3m full-year earnings improvement
$ million
FY26
52 weeks
FY25
53 weeks
Var
Sales revenue3,027.63,086.7(1.9%)
Gross profit986.6995.1(0.9%)
Gross margin %32.6%32.2%+40 bps
Cost of doing business964.0993.8(3.0%)
CODB % of sales31.8%32.2%(40) bps
Operating profit³22.61.3+$21.3m
Operating margin %0.7%0.0%+70 bps
Adjusted NPAT⁴13.5(4.5)+$18.0m
Reported NPAT
5
11.2(2.8)+$14.0m
Dividend declared---
REPORTED REVENUE
$3,027.6m
COMPARABLE 52 WEEKS
1
(0.2%)
SAME-STORE SALES²
+0.4%
Group financial performance
14
GROUP GROSS PROFIT MARGIN · % OF SALES
THE WAREHOUSE , GP % BY QUARTER · STRONG FINISH IN RED
Group
•Group gross profit margin increased 40bps to 32.6%, with the full-year
improvement delivered through a 90bps uplift in the second half
•The Warehouse was the primary driver, as first-half clearance activity gave
way to stronger underlying trading margins in the fourth quarter
•Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery also delivered improved margin
performance through the year, supporting a broader-based Group recovery
The Warehouse
•First-half margin reflected the clearance of aged inventory from prior years, with the impact
reducing as the year progressed
•Fourth-quarter margin increased to 36.9% led by Home and Apparel
•The Warehouse exited FY26 with cleaner inventory, improved trading mechanics and
refreshed ranges heading into FY27
•We seek further opportunity for margin expansion as fundamental retail capability is restored
and new ranges support more full price sales
H1 (20)bps · H2 +90bps
Full year 32.6% vs 32.2% +40bps
Gross margin overview
Group gross profit margin increased 40bps to 32.6%, driven by an improved second-half from all three brands and a strong fourth-quarter contribution
from The Warehouse
15
FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
1.Operating profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. For a reconciliation between Operating Profit and Reported EBIT, refer to Slide 31 of this
presentation and Note 2.0 of the financial statements
2.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure
GROSS PROFIT MARGIN AND COST OF DOING BUSINESS² · % OF SALES
Overview
•Gross margin increased to 32.6%, while the cost of doing
business reduced to 31.8% of sales
•This lifted operating profit to $22.6m and operating margin to
0.7%
•At the Group’s current sales base, every 10bps of operating
margin represents approximately $3m of operating profit¹
•All three brands contributed to the second-half improvement:
Warehouse Stationery maintained its stronger performance,
Noel Leeming continued to improve margin, and The
Warehouse recovered strongly in Q4
•Improvement occurred alongside inventory discipline, with
Group inventory reducing by $37.9m and aged inventory also
declining by 130 bps
16
Operating leverage returns for the first time since FY21
FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
Gross margin improved and the cost of doing business reduced in FY26, lifting operating margin
0.7%
FY25:0.0% - a 70bps improvement
FY26 OPERATING MARGIN
The cost reset programme
•Cost of doing business
1
reduced by $29.8m, reflecting delivery of the cost reset programme and
the additional trading week in FY25
•CODB
1
improved by 40bps to 31.8% of sales, making a material contribution to the Group’s
profitability uplift
•Employee expenses reduced by $6.9m, with savings from the support office restructure and TCS
partnership partly offset by higher store and distribution centre wages primarily driven by wage
inflation
•Employee expenses also benefited from one-off savings arising from the timing of the TCS
implementation
•IT costs reduced by $12.6m, driven by lower support charges and more disciplined project
activity
•Further benefits came from lower SaaS and advertising costs
•Depreciation and amortisation reduced by $9.1m as earlier system and previous store
investment programmes continued to amortise and capital expenditure was tightly managed
1.Cost of Doing Business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZIFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure
2.Approximately $4m of FY25 Brand and SSO comparatives have been reclassified to align with FY26 and future allocation basis
As % of sales
32.6%
32.2%
31.8%
CODB
1
BY ALLOCATION $ MILLION
FY26
52 weeks
FY25
2
53 weeks
Variance
Brand costs683.8682.5+0.2%
Support office costs226.2248.1(8.8%)
Depreciation & amortisation54.063.2(14.5%)
Total cost of doing business964.0993.8(3.0%)
CODB BY CATEGORY $ MILLION
CODB Overview
17
FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53rd week of FY25
2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year
3.Foot traffic and basket size are calculated on a 52 week same store basis
4.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure
5.Sales density is calculated on a 52-week basis
The Warehouse reduced its operating loss in FY26, supported by a stronger
second half. The immediate aim is to return the brand to profitability
Performance
•Same-store sales increased as customers bought more items, partly offset by lower
average prices in a value conscious market
•Gross margin improved in the second half and exited the year ahead of FY25, with the
strongest improvement in Q4
•Home and Apparel led the margin recovery, reinforcing the importance of these higher
margin categories to The Warehouse’s earnings
•Lower foot traffic was offset by better conversion and larger baskets, with customers
making fewer but more valuable visits
•Online sales remain an area of opportunity. New offers, including The Warehouse Club and
DoorDash, supported customer engagement, while stronger online margins more than
offset lower sales
FY26
52 weeks
FY25
53 weeks
Var
Sales ($ m)1,774.91,816.5(2.3%)
Operating profit / (loss) ($ m)(7.5)(12.2)+$4.7m
Operating margin (0.4%)(0.7%)+30 bps
Online sales ($ m)78.683.2(5.5%)
Online penetration4.4%4.6%(20) bps
Stores (#)8484—
Sales density
5
($/sqm)3,9013,870+0.8%
18
The Warehouse
BRAND PERFORMANCE
SAME-STORE SALES²
+0.6%
BASKET SIZE³
+0.8%
OPERATING PROFIT⁴ / (LOSS)
$(7.5)m
Improved by $4.7m, with most of the
improvement in the second half
UNITS +1.7% | ASP (1.0%)
$1,774.9m
VS COMPARABLE 52
WEEKS
1
(0.7%)
SALES
FOOT TRAFFIC (0.3%)
Home and Apparel margins improving
Home and Apparel are important to The Warehouse’s profitability, representing nearly half of sales and including some of its highest-margin
categories. Margins improved in both areas through better buying, stronger ranges and improved execution
Behind the improvement: stronger buying and planning discipline, rebuilt ranges and price points
Next: continue strengthening ranges, full-price sell-through and margin delivery across Home and Apparel
HOME AND APPAREL · CASH GROSS MARGIN %, FY22–FY26
Up in both
FY26
Apparel
Home
WHAT DROVE FY26
APPAREL
✓
More full-price sales — supported by better sell-through
✓
Better margins – across full-price and clearance sales
✓
Broad-based improvement: led by Womenswear, with Menswear and
Kidswear also ahead
HOME
✓
Aged inventory reduced—margins improved even though we cleared more
stock
✓
Home Textiles led the improvement, with Home Furnishings, Seasonal
Home and Seasonal Appliances also ahead
→
Gardening and Storage volumes increased, but at lower margins
19
BRAND PERFORMANCE - THE WAREHOUSE
FY26
52 weeks
FY25
53 weeks
Var
Sales ($ m)227.6226.0+0.7%
Operating profit / (loss) ($ m)15.98.2+$7.7m
Operating margin 7.0%3.6%+340 bps
Online sales ($ m)16.215.8+2.5%
Online penetration7.1%7.0%+10 bps
Stores (#)6766+1
Sales density
5
($/sqm)4,3414,297+1.0%
1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53rd week of FY25
2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year
3.Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same store basis
4.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure
5.Sales density is calculated on a 52-week basis
Warehouse Stationery returned to sales growth and nearly doubled operating
profit, supported by stronger margins and disciplined cost and stock management
Performance
•Sales returned to growth with both standalone stores and the 42 stores within The Warehouse
contributing
•Operating profit increased $7.7m to $15.9m, with operating margin improving to 7.0%
•Growth was led by Print & Create, Art & Craft and Office Furniture
•Print & Create benefited from growth in digital printing, copying and personalised products. Art
& Craft and Office Furniture also grew, supported by stronger ranges
•Disciplined pricing and stock management supported gross profit growth across all categories
along with improved range
•One store opened in Wellington Central during FY26, followed by Whitianga at the start of FY27
20
Warehouse Stationery
BRAND PERFORMANCE
SAME-STORE SALES²
+2.0%
FOOT TRAFFIC³
+0.2%
Conversion improved too
OPERATING PROFIT⁴ / (LOSS)
$15.9m
Up 94% on FY25 operating profit of
$8.2m
UNITS +3.4% | ASP (1.3%)
$227.6m
VS COMPARABLE 52
WEEKS
1
+2.5%
SALES
Profit up $10.1m on flat comparable sales. Noel Leeming ran a better business in
FY26 and is now investing to grow it
Performance
•Comparable sales were broadly flat, with non-repeatable commercial sales in the prior year being offset by
underlying growth in the retail business
•Operating profit increased by $10.1m to $21.8m, with operating margin improving to 2.1%
•Appliances and core technology led growth, supported by commercial wins, new brands and the Windows 10
and 3G transitions
•Intense competitor pricing in audio-visual and computing weighed on sales, with Noel Leeming maintaining
pricing discipline to protect margin and gain share where product and service are a difference
•Online grew strongly and now accounts for around one dollar in eight of the brand’s sales
•Investment in the store network continues, with Queen Street opened in September 2026 and Mangawhai
planned for late 2027
•Looking ahead we are focused on returning to top line growth and maintaining market share. We will do this by
capitalising on our scale advantage and continuing to make service a clear point of difference for customers
21
Noel Leeming
BRAND PERFORMANCE
SAME-STORE SALES²
(0.5%)
ONLINE SALES GROWTH³
+13.2%
Improved on-line traffic and conversion
OPERATING PROFIT⁴ / (LOSS)
$21.8m
Up $10.1m on FY25
UNITS (3.9%) | ASP +3.6% | FOOT TRAFFIC
3
(0.5%)
$1,017.4m
VS COMPARABLE 52
WEEKS
1
(0.2%)
SALES
$ million
FY26
52 weeks
FY25
53 weeks
Var
Sales ($ m)1,017.41,038.1(2.0%)
Operating profit ($ m)21.811.7+$10.1m
Operating margin2.1%1.1%+100 bps
Online sales
5
($ m)133.0117.5+13.2%
Online penetration13.1%11.3%+180 bps
Stores (#)6666—
Sales density
6
($/sqm)12,73412,724+0.1%
1.Comparable 52 week removes the 53rd week of FY25
2.Same store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, and the impact of opening and closing of stores during the reported and comparable year
3.Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same store basis
4.Operating Profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure
5.Online sales in FY25 was stated as $108.7 million. This has been re-stated to $117.5 million in this presentation recognising a reclassification of commercial online sales
6.Sales density is calculated on a 52-week basis
($96.1m)
Opening
net debt
+$193.5m
Operating
cash flow
($19.4m)
Capital
expenditure
2
($94.7m)
Lease
payments
($0.3m)
Other¹
($17.0m)
Closing
net debt
Free cash flow
1
: $79.4m
FREE CASH FLOW
$79.4m
A $124.6m improvement from FY25
AVERAGE DAILY BORROWINGS
-45% reduction
Against FY25 daily average
BANK INTEREST COST
$2.7m
Reduced 60% on lower debt levels
WHAT IT SAYS
•Operating cash flow improved by $121.2m to $193.5m, supported by
stronger trading performance and improved working capital. FY25 was
impacted by an extra week of negative net cash-flow
•Free cash flow increased to $79.4m from an outflow of $45.2m in FY25,
after capital expenditure and lease payments
•Capital expenditure increased 54% to $19.4m as investment shifted
towards stores, while net debt reduced by $79.1m to $17.0m
•The Group remains compliant with all banking covenants and has access
to available facilities to meet its needs
1.Free cash flow is calculated as Operating cash flow less capital expenditure and lease principal payments
2.The difference between cash flow capital expenditure of $19.4 million above and capital expenditure of $21.1m on the Project expenditure
slide and in Note 9.1 and Note 9.2 of the financial statements is due to timing of accruals and creditor payments
22
Cash flow and net debt
GROUP PERFORMANCE
Strong operating cash flow funded increased capital investment and reduced net debt by $79.1m to $17.0m
Closing inventory declined by $37.9m, reflecting lower aged stock and faster Group stock turn, while further improvement remains a priority
CLOSING INVENTORY · $ MILLION
562.3
FY22
493.3
FY23
472.1
FY24
476.7
FY25
438.8
FY26
−$37.9m
vs FY25
$438.8m
CLOSING INVENTORY
FY25 $476.7m
21.8%
AGED INVENTORY
1
FY25 23.1%
4.7x
GROUP STOCK TURN
FY25 4.6x
INVENTORY BY BRAND · $ MILLION
The Warehouse +
Warehouse Stationery
FY25
345.8
FY26
309.2
−10.6%
Noel Leeming
FY25
131.0
FY26
129.6
−1.0%
PRUDENT PROVISIONING
$18.9m
inventory provisions
4.7% of inventory cost, up
from 3.7%
COMMENTARY
Lower inventory was driven primarily by The Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery, including a $19.7m reduction in goods in transit.
Aged inventory reduced to 21.8% from 23.1%, while provisions increased to address selected aged, slow-moving and end-of-life stock.
The reset supports stronger stock flow and working-capital discipline, while clearance plans remain actively managed.
1.Aged inventory calculated as stock over six months old
23
Inventory improvements strengthened the balance sheet
GROUP PERFORMANCE
Project expenditure
TOTAL PROJECT EXPENDITURE
1
$27.8m
FY25: $21.0m
CAPITAL EXPENDITURE
$21.1m
76% of project spend
PROJECT EXPENDITURE BY CATEGORY · $ MILLION
$ millionFY26FY25
Store development, operations & property13.07.3
Information systems10.113.1
Digital3.30.1
Supply chain1.40.5
Total project expenditure27.821.0
of which capital expenditure21.112.4
of which SaaS & project opex6.78.6
WHAT IT SAYS
•Total project expenditure increased $6.8m to $27.8m, with the investment
mix shifting toward capital expenditure
•Capital expenditure increased $8.7m to $21.1m, primarily reflecting higher
investment in store development, operations and property. Digital and supply
chain capital investment also increased
•Key investments include fit-out of new stores and relocations, improved LED
lighting and HVAC in stores and in-store digital screen deployment
•SaaS and project opex reduced $1.9m to $6.7m. The reduction was
concentrated in information systems, partly offset by higher digital and
supply chain project opex
1.Total project expenditure includes capital expenditure, prepayments, SaaS expenditure and project operating expenditure
24
GROUP PERFORMANCE
Investment lifted in capital expenditure led by stores, operations and property
Store development,
operations & property
Information
systems
Digital
Supply chain
FY26
FY26 capitalFY26 SaaS & opex
FY25
FY25 capitalFY25 SaaS & opex
25
Mark Stirton
Group CEO
The Year Ahead
The year ahead
TRADING UPDATE
Trading in the first eight weeks of FY27: Group sales were broadly in line with the prior year, with
margin performance ahead of the prior comparable period
ENVIRONMENT
The retail environment remains challenging, with cautious consumer spending and continued
volatility. We will remain focused on the factors within our control
THE WAREHOUSE
Margin recovery at The Warehouse remains our most important earnings priority, while
continuing to deliver value for our customers. This will be supported by continued improvements
in product ranges, pricing, merchandise planning and inventory management
DISCIPLINE
Cost, capital and working-capital discipline will continue, alongside further work to strengthen
sourcing, supply-chain performance and inventory productivity across the Group
BRAND AND STORE
GROWTH
We will invest selectively to grow each of our retail brands, strengthening The Warehouse
customer proposition, growing Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery, and investing in new and
existing stores where we see attractive returns.
INVESTOR DAY
The launch of This Is Warehouse Country marks the next phase of The Warehouse’s recovery,
with our longer-term retail-led strategy and pathway to stronger, more sustainable returns to be
presented at Investor Day in November
2026 ANNUAL RESULTS
26
Building
exceptional
retail brands
27
28
Appendix
29 Sales summary
30 Quarterly sales by brand
31 EBIT and NPAT reconciliation
32 Investor metrics
33 Disclaimer
28
$ million
The
Warehouse
Warehouse
Stationery
Noel
Leeming
Group
FY26 reported sales (52 weeks)1,774.9227.61,017.43,027.6
FY25 reported sales (53 weeks)1,816.5226.01,038.13,086.7
FY26 growth on reported FY25(2.3%)+0.7%(2.0%)(1.9%)
FY25 sales on a 52-week basis1,787.7222.01,019.03,034.8
FY26 growth on 52-week FY25(0.7%)+2.5%(0.2%)(0.2%)
FY26 same-store sales growth (52 weeks)+0.6%+2.0%(0.5%)+0.4%
FY26 H1 sales (26 weeks)949.5116.1542.21,612.1
FY25 H1 sales (26 weeks)944.7109.8548.91,607.2
H1 growth+0.5%+5.7%(1.2%)+0.3%
FY26 H2 sales (26 weeks)825.4111.5475.21,415.5
FY25 H2 sales (27 weeks, as reported)871.8116.2489.21,479.5
H2 growth on reported FY25(5.3%)(4.0%)(2.9%)(4.3%)
H2 growth on 26 comparable weeks(2.1%)(0.6%)+1.1%(0.9%)
29
Sales summary
APPENDIX
$ millionQ1Q2Q3Q4FY
Q4 on 13
comparable wks
The Warehouse — FY26389.0560.5405.3420.11,774.9
— FY25386.3558.4415.9455.91,816.5
— growth+0.7%+0.4%(2.5%)(7.9%)(2.3%)(1.6%)
Warehouse Stationery — FY2652.263.957.154.4227.6
— FY2550.958.958.857.4226.0
— growth+2.6%+8.5%(2.9%)(5.2%)+0.7%+1.9%
Noel Leeming — FY26230.7311.5236.6238.61,017.4
— FY25229.1319.8234.9254.31,038.1
— growth+0.7%(2.6%)+0.7%(6.2%)(2.0%)+1.4%
Group (incl. Other) — FY26674.1938.0700.8714.73,027.6
— FY25668.0939.2710.5769.03,086.7
— growth+0.9%(0.1%)(1.4%)(7.1%)(1.9%)(0.3%)
30
Quarterly sales by brand
FY26 versus FY25 as reported. The 53rd week fell in the FY25 fourth quarter; a 13-week comparison is shown for Q4.
APPENDIX
Operating ProfitNPAT
2
$ millionFY26FY25FY26FY25
Reported earnings56.640.511.2(2.8)Statutory
Restructuring costs5.7—4.3—Head office redundancies
Adjustments for NZ IFRS 16
1
(39.7)(39.2)(2.0)(1.7)Lease accounting
Adjusted earnings22.61.313.5(4.5)Non-GAAP
RESTRUCTURING
•Restructuring costs of $5.7m before tax relate to head-office redundancies
arising from the cost reset programme and TCS partnership
NZ IFRS 16
•Operating Profit excludes NZ IFRS 16 to maintain comparability with historical
performance and common market practice. The FY26 adjustment was $39.7m
at EBIT and $2.0m at NPAT
1.Refer to Note 2.2 of the Financial Statements for further details on the NZ IFRS 16 adjustment
2.Adjusted NPAT is from continuing operations before unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure. A reconciliation between Adjusted and Statutory NPAT is located in Note 5.0 of the financial statements.
31
EBIT and NPAT reconciliation
For the 52 weeks ended 2 August 2026
APPENDIX
FY26FY25
Returns
Return on equity
1
3.8%(0.8%)
Return on net operating assets
2
3.6%3.0%
Dividend payout ratio——
Cash generation
Free cash flow
3
$79.4m$(45.2)m
Cash conversion ratio
4
1.29x(0.50)x
Stock turn (times)4.74.6
Gearing
Net debt$17.0m$96.1m
Gearing (net debt over net debt plus equity)5.2%24.3%
Profitability
Gross profit margin32.6%32.2%
CODB as a percentage of sales31.8%32.2%
Operating profit margin0.7%0.0%
1.Return on Equity is calculated as Net Profit from Continuing Operations After Tax / average Shareholder Equity
2.Return on Net Operating Assets is calculated as Net Operating Profit After Tax (excluding interest) / average Net Operating Assets
3.Free cash flow is calculated as Operating cash flow less capital expenditure and lease principal payments
4.Cash conversion is calculated as Operating cash flow / EBITDA on a pre-IFRS 16 basis
32
Investor metrics
APPENDIX
32
This presentation may contain forward looking statements and projections. There can
be no certainty of the outcome and projections involve known and unknown risks,
uncertainties, assumptions and other important factors that could cause the actual
outcomes to be materially different from the events or results expressed or implied by
such statements and projections.
While all reasonable care has been taken in the preparation of this presentation, The
Warehouse Group Limited does not make any representation, assurance or guarantees
as to the accuracy or completeness of any information in this presentation. The forward-
looking statements and projections in this report reflect views held at the date of this
presentation.
Except as required by applicable law or any applicable Listing Rules, the Relevant
Persons disclaim any obligation or undertaking to update any information in this
presentation.
A number of non-GAAP financial measures are used in this presentation. You should not
consider any of these in isolation from, or as a substitute for, the information provided in
the financial statements for the 52 weeks ended 2 August 2026, which are available at
www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz.
This presentation does not constitute investment advice, or an inducement,
recommendation or offer to buy or sell any securities in The Warehouse Group Limited.
33
Disclaimer
---
2026
Annual Report
THE WAREHOUSE GROUP
32
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026
Table of Contents
2026 at a Glance 4
Chair’s Report 6
CEO’s Report 8
Financial Review 12
Purpose, Ambition and Values 16
Integrated Report 18
Risk Management 20
Our Stores and Supply Chain 24
Our Brands 26
Financial Statements 32
Independent Auditor’s Report 52
Governance Report 58
Statutory Disclosures 76
Directory 83
The Warehouse Group Board and Executive Leadership
Team are pleased to present our FY26 Integrated Annual
Report.
John Journee
Chair
30 September 2026
Dean Hamilton
Audit and Risk Committee Chair
30 September 2026
54
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 20262026 at a Glance
2026 at a Glance
Our impact
Group performance
Cost of doing
business % of sales
2
52-week same-
store sales
1
FY25: 32.2%
Market-based (compared
to FY23 base year)
0.4%
31.8%
Group sales
Group operating profit
3
FY25: $1.3m
$3.0b
$22.6m
Group gross
profit margin
32.6%
contributed to
NZ charities and
communities
in FY26
$1.9m
eNPS
(FY25: 36.0pts)
25.0pts
74%
1. Same-store sales removes the 53rd week of FY25, excludes online, NLG Commercial, and the impact of opening and closing of stores
during the reported and comparable year.
2. Cost of doing business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure.
3. Operating profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure.
Reduction in
scope 1 & 2
emissions
Down 1.9% on a
53-week FY25
FY25: 32.2%
54
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 20262026 at a Glance
It has been another challenging year for
New Zealand consumers. There were
early signs that consumer confidence was
beginning to improve around summer,
before international conflict created
renewed uncertainty and increased pressure
on fuel, freight, inflation and global supply
chains.
Despite this backdrop, the Group
delivered improved performance. Sales
remained steady on a comparable basis,
and operating profit materially improved
on FY25, supported by disciplined cost
management, margin expansion, and
operational improvements across the
business. While these are positive indicators
of the turnaround underway, there is
still significant work ahead to restore
sustainable returns for shareholders.
The Board is pleased with the progress
made during FY26. Margin improvement
initiatives gained traction in Noel Leeming
and Warehouse Stationery, and positive
signs emerged in The Warehouse during the
fourth quarter. However, the turnaround of
The Warehouse remains critical to improving
overall Group performance.
Throughout FY26, the Board supported the
business through considerable change and
uncertainty. This included the turnaround
initiatives, cost reset programme,
responding to the impacts of geopolitical
disruption and rising fuel and freight costs,
and initiating the strategic partnership with
Tata Consultancy Services. The Board has
supported management in creating a clear
brand focused retail-led strategy.
We welcomed Hamish Rumbold to
the Board in November 2025. Hamish
has brought valuable governance and
commercial experience that further
strengthens the Board. Also in November
2025, Dame Joan Withers and Robbie
Tindall retired from the Board. On behalf of
the Board, we sincerely thank Dame Joan
Chair’s
Report
John Journee | Chair
The Board is pleased with
the progress made during
FY26, with improvement
initiatives gaining
traction.
and Robbie for their longstanding and valuable
contributions and service to The Warehouse
Group.
FY26 marked Mark Stirton’s first full year as
Group Chief Executive Officer, and he has
wasted no time getting stuck into the work
at hand. Mark and his leadership team have
brought focus, passion, pace and discipline
to the business. They have aligned on a
clear strategic direction, acted decisively,
strengthened execution and rallied the
organisation around its customers and
brands. I thank them for their leadership and
commitment.
The Board has carefully considered the
payment of a dividend for FY26.
While performance improved during the
year, the Board has decided not to declare a
final dividend for FY26. Our priority remains
restoring financial performance and ensuring
the Group can continue investing in the actions
required to support the turnaround. The
Board retains its intention to resume dividend
payments in the future.
Looking ahead, the Group continues to
take decisive action. We will maintain cost
and capital discipline, strengthen retail
fundamentals, improve customer experience
and implement a retail strategy that builds
brand equity and delivers sustainable returns.
Economic recovery in New Zealand continues
to be slow, consumers remain cautious with
their spending, with market conditions likely
to remain challenging in the near term. The
Group’s path forward will take time, however
the Board is confident in the calibre of
management, the direction being taken, the
actions underway and the progress being
made.
This is my first Annual Report as Chair of The
Warehouse Group, and I would like to thank
Dame Joan for her guidance during my
transition to the role and my fellow directors
for their support during the year. Having served
on the Board and in executive roles across the
business, including as Interim Group Chief
Executive Officer, it is a privilege to continue
serving this iconic New Zealand business as we
work to restore its performance and realise its
potential.
Finally, a heartfelt thank you to our leadership
team and our team members across New
Zealand. Over the past year, they have
continued to serve customers, adapt to
significant change and support one another
through a demanding period, all while making
steady progress.
To our shareholders, thank you for your ongoing
support. We know there is more work to
do, and we remain determined to improve
performance.
Ngā mihi,
John Journee
Chair
76
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Chair’s Report
CEO’s
Report
Mark Stirton | Group CEO
FY26 was a year of progress for The
Warehouse Group and the first full financial
year of a brand-led operating model.
The Group focused on what it could control
to improve performance and store experience
in a tough environment where customers
remained cautious in a volatile economy.
Financial performance improved, costs were
reduced and the work to strengthen retail
fundamentals began to show through across
the business. These are positive signs, but
profitability remains below our ambitions
and there is much more work ahead.
Financial performance
The Group delivered sales of $3.0 billion,
down 1.9% on FY25 and up 0.4% on a
52-week same-store sales basis.
Group gross profit margin was 32.6%, an
improvement of 40 basis points. Noel Leeming
and Warehouse Stationery delivered solid margin
growth through the year. The Warehouse’s
margin was broadly flat for the full year and
improved in the second half, supported by
more full-price sales and margin growth
in the key areas of Home and Apparel.
Group operating profit increased to $22.6
million, compared with $1.3 million in FY25. This
improvement reflected gross margin growth and
sustained cost discipline across the Group.
All three brands contributed to the improvement
in profitability. Warehouse Stationery nearly
doubled profit and Noel Leeming made the largest
contribution to the Group’s earnings recovery.
The Warehouse reduced its operating loss from
FY25 and ended the year in a better position.
In November 2025 the Group announced a
cost reset programme and its intention to
reduce cost of doing business to below 31%
of sales. Group cost of doing business was
$964.0 million, or 31.8% of sales, compared
with 32.2% in FY25. This was achieved
by reducing Store Support Office costs
and simplifying the operating model.
The balance sheet was rebuilt during FY26,
with $79.4 million of free cash flow generated
and net debt reduced to $17.0 million from
$96.1 million in FY25. Inventory was $438.8
million, down 7.9%, with improved stock health,
better stock turn and lower aged inventory.
The majority of remaining aged inventory is
made up of everyday continuity products that
continue to have ongoing sales demand.
Although an important improvement on FY25,
our performance is not yet at an acceptable
level of return. Further margin recovery at
The Warehouse, continued cost discipline
and stronger inventory performance remain
critical to lifting Group profitability.
Strengthening the retail
fundamentals
The Group has made headway
strengthening the retail fundamentals
required to improve performance.
As signalled at the end of the first half, the
Group began work to improve supply chain
performance. An independent review identified
significant opportunities to improve product
availability and reduce cost to serve. Changes
are underway to unlock trapped value.
The Group’s partnership with Tata Consultancy
Services is helping simplify our technology
and managed services, reduce costs and
provide access to digital and AI capability.
At The Warehouse, work to improve
merchandise planning, ranging and inventory
management began to show through in
the second half, particularly in our priority
categories Home and Apparel. While there is
more work to do, the second half provided early
signs that these changes are gaining traction.
The Warehouse completed significant customer
segmentation during the year. Built on real
spending data, behavioural insights and
research, this work has created a much clearer
understanding of our customers and will
shape future decisions across merchandise,
marketing, stores and customer experience.
Progress has been made,
but our ambitions are
much bigger.
9
CEO’s Report
8
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026
11
Investing in our stores
Cost reduction has been balanced with
selective investment in areas that support
customers, margin and growth.
Noel Leeming has returned to central Auckland
with a new flagship store designed around
modern, experience-led retail. Noel Leeming
also relocated its Palmerston North store.
Warehouse Stationery opened a standalone
store in Wellington Central and began
FY27 opening a new store in Whitianga.
Investment in The Warehouse continues across
store presentation, from lifting the basics like
lighting, racking and flooring, to stronger visual
merchandising of higher-margin categories
including Home, Apparel and Health & Beauty.
Leadership and capability
In FY26 we intentionally rebuilt the
Executive Leadership Team to support
the turnaround. These changes reflect
the areas most important to improving
performance and support clearer priorities.
Carrie Fairley was permanently appointed Chief
Merchandise Officer, with sourcing brought
under merchandise to create end-to-end
ownership of our product ranges. Lyle Brady was
appointed Group Chief Supply Chain Officer and
Deric Fairley appointed Acting Chief Planning
Officer. Frankie Coulter joined the business as
Chief Marketing Officer for The Warehouse and
Warehouse Stationery, and Ankit Gupta was
appointed Group Chief Data and AI Officer.
Looking ahead to FY27
The Group enters FY27 with clear priorities.
Cost and capital discipline will continue
alongside improvements in merchandise
planning, inventory management and
supply chain performance. Margin recovery
at The Warehouse remains central,
supported by continued investment in
product, stores and customer experience.
The brand relaunch This Is Warehouse Country
at the start of FY27 marks an important next
phase for The Warehouse and our ambition to
be New Zealand’s number one retailer again.
It reflects our confidence in the strength of
the brand and the opportunity ahead of us.
Over the past year, we have asked a great deal
of our people. Teams have worked through
significant change, and I thank our team
members for their commitment and the pride
they bring to serving customers every day.
I thank our Chair, John Journee and the Board
for their support as we have strengthened
the business and developed our strategy.
To our customers, thank you for continuing to
choose us. To our shareholders, thank you for
your patience and support. Progress has been
made, but our ambitions are much bigger.
Ngā mihi,
Mark Stirton
Group Chief Executive Officer
10
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026
Financial performance
FY26 was a standard 52-week financial year ending
2 August 2026, compared with a 53-week financial
year in FY25. Revenue commentary is shown on
both a reported basis and a comparable 52-week or
52-week same-store basis. Unless stated otherwise,
all commentary compares FY26 with the reported
53-week FY25 result.
Sales revenue
Against a backdrop of cautious consumer
sentiment, group sales were $3,027.6 million, down
1.9% on FY25.
The prior year included an additional trading week
worth $51.9 million of sales, which accounted for
most of the reported decline. On a comparable
52-week basis, group sales were broadly flat, down
0.2%, while same-store sales increased 0.4%.
Financial
Review
Customers remained value conscious
throughout the year. Across the Group,
customers bought more items at lower average
prices. Customers consolidated their shopping
trips: although store traffic eased by 0.2%,
customers purchased more on each visit,
lifting average basket value, while conversion
remained stable.
Online sales represented 7.5% of sales, up from
7.0% in FY25, with Noel Leeming making the
largest contribution to growth.
Gross profit margin
Group gross profit margin increased 40 basis
points to 32.6%, with Noel Leeming and
Warehouse Stationery ahead for the full year
and all three brands ahead in the second half.
Margin recovery accelerated in the second half,
with gross profit margin increasing 90 basis
points compared with the prior corresponding
period.
Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery
delivered solid margin growth through the year.
The Warehouse’s full-year margin was 20 basis
points below FY25, but it recovered through
the second half and finished the fourth quarter
strongly and ahead of the prior year.
Gross profit was $986.6 million compared with
$995.1 million in FY25. The difference reflects
the additional trading week included in FY25.
Cost of doing business
Cost of doing business reduced by $29.8 million
to $964.0 million and fell to 31.8% of sales from
32.2% in FY25. The result reflects the Group’s
cost reset programme and the additional
trading week included in FY25.
Employee costs were $6.9 million lower, with
savings from the support office restructure
partly offset by higher wages across stores and
distribution centres.
IT costs reduced by $12.6 million through lower
support charges and better control of project
spending. Depreciation and amortisation
reduced by $9.1 million as earlier technology
and previous store investment programmes
became fully depreciated or amortised.
Operating profit
FY26 was the first year since FY21 that the
Group lifted gross margin while reducing cost
of doing business as a percentage of sales,
contributing to operating profit increasing to
$22.6 million from $1.3 million in FY25.
The first half of the year focused on reducing
costs. The second half delivered stronger
margins, generating around two-thirds of the
full-year increase in operating profit.
All three brands contributed to the increase
in operating profit. Noel Leeming made the
largest contribution to the Group’s earnings
recovery, with operating profit increasing
to $21.8 million from $11.7 million in FY25.
Warehouse Stationery nearly doubled
operating profit to $15.9 million from $8.2
million, while The Warehouse reduced its
operating loss to $7.5 million from $12.2 million
in FY25.
Group operating profit
1
Cost of doing business as
a percentage of sales
2
Group gross profit margin
Operating margin
(FY25: $1.3m)
(FY25: 32.2%)
(FY25: 32.2%)
(FY25: 0.0%)
+$21.3m year-on-year
improvement
-40 basis points year-on-year
+40 basis points year-on-year
+0.7 percentage points
year-on-year
$22.6m
31.8%
32.6%
0.7%
1. Operating profit (EBIT pre-IFRS 16) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16 and unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure.
2. Cost of doing business (CODB) excludes the impact of NZ IFRS 16, unusual items, and is a non-GAAP measure.
1312
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Review
Net profit
Adjusted net profit after tax
3
was $13.5
million, compared with a loss of $4.5 million
in FY25. Reported net profit after tax was
$11.2 million, compared with a loss of $2.8
million in FY25. Adjusted net profit after tax
excludes restructuring costs of $5.7 million
($4.3 million after tax) relating to the support
office restructure and Tata Consulting Services
partnership, and the effect of NZ IFRS 16; a
reconciliation is provided in note 5 to the
financial statements.
Brand performance
The Warehouse
The Warehouse made meaningful progress
during FY26, particularly in the second half of
the year.
Sales were $1,774.9 million, down 2.3% on FY25.
Sales increased 0.6% on a comparative 52-week
same-store basis. Customers purchased more
items at lower average prices in a highly value-
conscious market. Online sales represented
4.4% of sales, compared with 4.6% in FY25.
Gross margin for the full year was 20 basis
points below FY25 but recovered through the
second half and finished the fourth quarter
strongly and ahead of the prior year with the
recovery led by Home and Apparel. These
categories are central to The Warehouse’s
profitability, and in both, cash gross margin
improved through stronger trading execution
rather than changes in sales mix.
The operating loss reduced to $7.5 million
from $12.2 million in FY25, with most of the
improvement occurring in the second half.
Warehouse Stationery
FY26 was a standout year for Warehouse
Stationery. Sales returned to growth, operating
profit nearly doubled, and the brand recorded
the highest operating margin in the Group.
Sales were $227.6 million, up 0.7% on FY25.
Sales increased 2.0% on a comparative 52-week
same-store basis. Growth was driven by
both standalone stores and stores operating
within The Warehouse network. Online sales
represented 7.1% of sales, broadly in line with
FY25.
Margin performance strengthened through
the second half. Disciplined pricing and stock
management supported gross profit growth
across every category, contributing to operating
profit increasing to $15.9 million from $8.2
million in FY25.
Noel Leeming
Noel Leeming made the largest contribution
to the Group’s earnings recovery during FY26.
Operating profit increased significantly despite
continuing competitive pressure across key
technology categories.
Sales were $1,017.4 million, down 2.0% on FY25.
On a comparable 52-week basis, sales declined
0.2%, reflecting non-repeatable commercial
sales in the prior year. Excluding commercial
sales, the retail business grew. Same-store
sales declined 0.5% as customers made fewer
but larger purchases. Online sales grew and
represented 13.1% of sales, up from 11.3% in
FY25.
Noel Leeming maintained pricing discipline,
with margin growth across both halves
supported by higher average selling prices.
Appliances was the brand’s strongest category
this year and made a positive contribution to
margin growth. Together, these factors helped
lift operating profit to $21.8 million from $11.7
million in FY25.
Balance sheet
The balance sheet was significantly stronger at
the end of FY26 than a year earlier, reflecting
stronger cash generation, lower inventory and
reduced debt.
Operating cash flow increased to $193.5 million
from $72.3 million in FY25. Operating cash flow
is stated after interest on leases but before
lease principal payments of $94.7 million,
which are included in financing activities.
Free cash flow increased to $79.4 million
from an outflow of $45.2 million after capital
expenditure and lease payments.
Working capital reduced by $22.9 million
during the year, driven by a $37.9 million
reduction in inventory, partly offset by lower
trade payables. Bank interest paid was $2.7
million compared with $6.7 million in FY25, a
60% reduction, while lease principal payments
reduced to $94.7 million from $104.9 million.
Inventory reduced to $438.8 million from $476.7
million in FY25. Aged inventory reduced to
21.8% from 23.1%, while stock turn improved
to 4.7 times from 4.6 times. The reduction
was driven primarily by The Warehouse and
Warehouse Stationery and included lower
goods in transit holdings.
Net debt decreased to $17.0 million from $96.1
million in FY25, with average daily borrowings
reducing by 45%. The Group met all debt
covenant obligations throughout the year.
Project expenditure increased to $27.8 million
from $21.0 million in FY25, while capital
expenditure increased to $21.1 million from
$12.4 million. Investment was directed towards
stores, operations, property, digital and
supply chain initiatives, reflecting a shift from
major systems investment to improving and
expanding the store network.
Free cash flow
Capital
expenditure
Net debt
Closing inventory
(FY25: $(45.2)m)
(FY25: $12.4m)
(FY25: $96.1m)
(FY25: $476.7m)
+$124.6m year-on-year
improvement
-$79.1m year-on-year reduction
-$37.9m year-on-year
reduction
$79.4m
$21.1m
$17.0m
$438.8m
3. Adjusted NPAT is from continuing operations before unusual items and is a non-GAAP measure.
1514
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Review
Purpose, Ambition
and Values
Ambition
Values
Be a highly desired retail stock
Think Customer • Do Good • Own it
Purpose
To build exceptional retail brands that
customers love, our team takes pride in, and
deliver sustainable shareholder returns
1716
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Purpose, Ambition and Values
1918
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Integrated Report
Integrated
Report
Integrated Report
Welcome to The Warehouse Group’s 2026 Integrated Annual Report.
This report explains how our resources contributed to value creation in FY26 through our retail
value creation model and purpose. We describe this through six capitals: Financial Capital,
Our Store and Distribution Network, Our Brand and Customers, Human Capital, Social and
Relationship Capital, and Our Environment.
Delivering the
best products and
services in store
and online
SERVICING
CUSTOMERS
STORE DEVELOPMENT
AND OPERATIONS
RANGE AND
ASSORTMENT BUILD
SOURCE AND
PROCUREMENT
CUSTOMER
UNDERSTANDING
TRANSPORT, LOGISTICS
AND DISTRIBUTION
Property optimisation,
space and visual
merchandising
Products the
customers want at
the right price
Finding great
products from a range
of trusted suppliers
We know our
customers best
Getting products to
stores and customers
efficiently
O
u
r
C
u
l
t
u
r
e
O
u
r
S
y
s
t
e
m
s
O
u
r
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
e
s
O
u
r
B
r
a
n
d
s
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
t
i
e
s
,
S
h
a
r
e
h
o
l
d
e
r
s
C
u
s
t
o
m
e
r
s
,
T
e
a
m
M
e
m
b
e
r
s
,
S
u
p
p
l
i
e
r
s
TO BUILD
EXCEPTIONAL
RETAIL BRANDS
Financial Capital
Ensure financial resilience, free
cash flow and available liquidity to
implement strategy and provide a
sustainable return to shareholders.
Our Store and Distribution
Network
Ensure we have the right products,
at the right price, in the right place,
at the right time for our customers.
Our Brand and Customers
Build a world-class customer retail
experience, enabled by our portfolio
of brands.
Human Capital
Foster connection, inclusion &
impact; empower all team members
to thrive; and ensure everyone gets
home safe at the end of the day.
Social and Relationship
Capital
Support the communities in which
we serve and ensure the basic
human and labour rights of workers
in our supply chain are respected.
Our Environment
Improve the sustainability of our
products; provide solutions to reduce
post-consumer waste, and improve
the sustainable performance of our
operations.
InputsRetail value creation
Financial
Capital
Our Store and
Distribution
Network
Our Brand and
Customers
Human Capital
Social and
Relationship
Capital
Our
Environment
$193.5m
Operating
cash flow
(FY25: $72.3m)
217
Stores
(FY25: 216)
$1.9m
Raised for NZ
charities and
communities
77.6
NPS
(FY25: 79.7)
66%
Private label
sales with
sustainable
packaging
(FY25: 66%)
25.0pts
eNPS
(FY25: 36.0pts)
$79.4m
Free cash flow
(FY25: $(45.2)m)
21.8%
Aged inventory
(FY25: 23.1%)
7.5%
Online sales
(FY25: 7.0%)
74%
Reduction in scope
1 & 2 emissions
(market-based)
compared to FY23 base
year
0%
Median gender
pay gap
(FY25: 0%)
TRIFR (Total
Recorded Injury
Frequency Rate)
28.3
(FY25: 30.2)
(FY25: 283 tonnes)
$209.2m
Trading EBITDA
(FY25: $197.0m)
4.7x
Stock turn
(FY25: 4.6x)
492284 tonnes
Factory ethical
assessments
Of post-consumer
waste collected for
reuse or recycling
+0.4%
52-week same-
store sales
79%
Operational
waste from
landfill
(FY25: 79%)
per million hours worked
Together, these capitals underpin long-term
value for our customers, team members,
suppliers, communities and shareholders.
Materiality within our six capitals differs from
the financial materiality applied to our financial
statements. It reflects the areas that were
most important to improving, influencing or
protecting outcomes during FY26, guided by
our strategy, risk appetite and performance
objectives.
Materiality changes over time as our
circumstances, progress and priorities evolve.
This report focuses on the matters that were
most material to long-term value creation in
FY26. It is not intended to cover every aspect of
our performance, but rather the areas where
we focused our efforts to improve outcomes,
manage risks and create value for our
stakeholders.
FY26 Outcomes
2120
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Risk Management
The Group’s risk management framework has
been designed to identify, assess, control, and
monitor its key risks. The identification and
ongoing management of these key risks assists
the business in achieving its objectives.
The Group recognises four main categories of
risk:
Strategic risk – risks that could affect the
Group’s long-term direction, business model,
competitive position, or ability to deliver its
value proposition to customers.
Financial risk – risks that could affect the
Group’s financial strength, including its ability
to manage debt, liquidity, funding, market
exposures, capital investment, and other
financial obligations.
Operational risk – risks arising from the
day-to-day operation of the Group, including
people, health and safety, legal and regulatory
compliance, technology, data, cybersecurity,
business continuity, and internal processes
and controls.
Business risk – risks arising from operating
in the retail market, including changes in
customer demand, consumer behaviour,
product relevance, pricing and margin
decisions, supply chain performance, and the
effectiveness of the Group’s retail channels
and propositions.
Risk
Management
Risk management framework
Responsibility for risk management sits with
the Group’s Leadership Team, assisted by
specialised risk functions and other functional
teams within the Group.
Rapid change and increased technological
innovation within the retail sector provide
challenges for the Group to compete effectively.
To remain resilient in the Group’s constantly
evolving environment, the Leadership Team
promotes a proactive and decentralised
approach to risk management. Team members
at all levels are empowered and expected to
take ownership of risk in the work they do and
the decisions they make. This includes adhering
to Group-wide policies and procedures,
identifying emerging risks, escalating
concerns where necessary, and implementing
appropriate mitigations.
Key enterprise risks are addressed through
tailored mitigation strategies embedded across
strategic planning, financial management,
operational execution, and business processes.
These mitigation strategies may include
accepting certain risks where appropriate,
avoiding exposure where possible, reducing
risk through internal controls and process
improvements, sharing risk through
partnerships or insurance, or transferring risk
via contractual arrangements. All risk responses
are designed to align with the Group’s appetite
for risk, ensuring that risk-taking supports
long-term value creation while protecting
the interests of shareholders and other
stakeholders.
Key enterprise risks
The Group’s assessment of its key enterprise
risks has been undertaken using a Dynamic Risk
Assessment approach. In addition to evaluating
risks’ inherent and residual likelihoods and
impacts, Dynamic Risk Assessment considers
both the interconnectedness and velocity of
risks to better understand their contagion
consequences. Those factors, along with the
indicated proximity of a given risk, help the
Group prioritise responses to high-impact
active and emerging risks.
The Group’s Dynamic Risk Assessment
identified its:
Most influential risks – those enterprise risks
that have the most effect on other risks when
they occur.
Most cumulative risks – those enterprise risks
that are most affected by the occurrence of
other risks.
Most expected risk scenarios – clusters of
enterprise risks with strong links that cause
their effects to aggregate. Clusters allow other
less influential risks to have a greater effect.
The Group’s top key enterprise risks are
summarised in the adjacent table.
2322
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Risk Management
Key Enterprise Risks
RiskCategory
Inherent
Risk
Primary Mitigation Strategies
Residual
Risk
Leadership
Strategic Very High A consistent enterprise-wide leadership framework,
targeted development pathways, coaching, mentoring,
leadership assessment and talent review processes.
Medium
Business and
brand proposition
Strategic Very High Activities that connect clearly defined brand propositions
to our markets and customers, coupled with measurement
and reporting to monitor effectiveness.
Medium
Competitive
threats
Strategic Very High Market share tracking using independent card-spend data,
with sustained movements reviewed by management and
the Board and reflected in category, pricing and network
decisions.
High
Culture
Strategic High Aligned performance practices, targeted engagement and
wellbeing initiatives, and culture activation programmes
that strengthen connection, accountability and
performance outcomes.
Medium
Customer
targeting
Strategic High Defined customer segments, growth segment strategies,
and segmentation review activities that maintain
customer clarity and tactical relevance.
Medium
Socio-economic
Strategic High Ownership of a portfolio of different businesses with
different value propositions in different retail markets,
including adopting an Everyday Low Price architecture
within The Warehouse.
Medium
Profit margins
and costs
Financial Very High Margin discipline, demand-aligned inventory buying, cash
and margin monitoring, centralised cost governance, and
defined intervention triggers.
High
Process and
systems
Operational Very High A comprehensive operational governance and oversight
framework, architecture and technology standards, and
initiatives aligned with target-state architecture and
strategic objectives.
High
Talent and
capability
Operational High Strategic workforce planning, succession and talent
management, market-responsive reward and employee
value proposition strategies, and leadership, capability and
culture programmes.
High
Cybersecurity
Operational High Proactive threat detection and response, continuous
security monitoring, security awareness training, identity
and data protection, and ongoing evolution of controls
and tools to address current and emerging threats.
Medium
Health and safety
Operational High A health safety and welfare framework that includes
robust risk management practices, assurance
programmes, critical risk controls, and a centralised
approach to injury management and recovery.
Low
Product offering
BusinessVery High Dedicated buyers and planners operating within
a structured merchandise governance framework,
supported by category strategies, range reviews, supplier
oversight, and performance monitoring.
High
Supply chain and
global instability
Business Very High Multi-source strategies, structured supplier management
processes, freight contractor and lane diversification,
proactive disruption management, and network
management.
High
In-store
experience
Business High Investment in store environment enhancements, customer
experience improvements, merchandising innovation,
and store format development to improve customer
engagement, relevance and ease of shopping.
Medium
Merchandise
agility
BusinessHigh Fit for purpose merchandising processes and systems that
support timely responses to market trends and demand
changes, targeted clearance and promotional activity, and
ongoing monitoring of stock performance.
Medium
2524
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Risk Management
Our Stores and
Supply Chain
8
6
MATAMATA
BELL BLOCK
NP CENTRAL
TAURANGA
MT MAUNGANUI
FRASER COVE
THE CROSSING
PĀPĀMOA
CAMBRIDGE
TE AWAMUTU
TOKOROA
TE KUITI
ROTORUA
LEVIN
PARAPARAUMU
RANGIORA
OAMARU
ALEXANDRA
DUNEDIN
ASHBURTON
BLENHEIM
KAITĀIA
KAIKOHE
DARGAVILLE
WAIPAPA
KERIKERI
WHANGĀREI
WHAKATĀNE
WARKWORTH
GISBORNE
TAUPŌ
HASTINGS
MASTERTON
DANNEVIRKE
UPPER HUTT
INVERCARGILL
GORE
BALCLUTHA
TIMARU
QUEENSTOWN
WĀNAKA
NAPIER
HAWERA
PALMERSTON NORTH
WHANGANUI
FEILDING
NELSON
RICHMOND
GREYMOUTH
MOTUEKA
WHITIANGA
THAMES
MORRINSVILLE
CHRISTCHURCH
14
WELLINGTON
14
AUCKLAND
54
HAMILTON
12
MAP KEY
The Warehouse Store
Warehouse Stationery Store
SWAS Store
Noel Leeming Store
ONLINE STORES
Warehouse Stationery
Noel Leeming
The Warehouse
PHYSICAL STORES
84
67
66
217 stores
2 distribution centres
The Warehouse stores
Warehouse Stationery stores
including 42 SWAS
(store-within-a-store)
Noel Leeming stores
Our stores and supply chain
The Warehouse Group operates some of New
Zealand’s best-known retail brands and one
of the country’s largest retail footprints, with
217 stores across The Warehouse, Warehouse
Stationery and Noel Leeming, supported
by two large-scale distribution centres and
international sourcing hubs.
With 85% of New Zealanders within a
20-minute drive of one of our stores, our
nationwide reach is a key strength that
helps us serve customers and communities
throughout New Zealand.
Investing in store experience
and footprint
FY26 marked a return to selective investment in
the in-store experience and footprint growth.
Warehouse Stationery opened a new store in
Wellington Central during the year, increasing
its network to 67 stores. The brand expanded
further with a new store opening in Whitianga
at the beginning of FY27.
Noel Leeming opened a new store in
Palmerston North, relocating to a more
modern site. The brand announced its return to
Auckland’s Queen Street with a new concept
store format that opened in September 2026.
In March, the Group announced plans for new
The Warehouse and Noel Leeming stores in
Mangawhai, scheduled to open in late-2027.
At The Warehouse, investment focused on
improving the in-store experience. Priority
stores are receiving upgrades to lighting,
flooring and racking, alongside improvements
to visual merchandising in Home, Apparel and
Health & Beauty. These categories are a key part
of margin recovery and improving performance
at The Warehouse.
Work is underway on a future The Warehouse
flagship store concept to help shape the next
phase of store investment.
Improving supply chain
performance
Having the right product, on the right shelf, at
the right time is critical to delivering value for
customers.
As signalled at the end of the first half, the
Group is undertaking a broad programme of
work to improve cost to serve and product
availability across the supply chain.
In FY26, the Group established a dedicated
supply chain role on the Executive Leadership
Team to bring greater accountability for the
end-to-end movement of products across the
business.
During the year, the Group undertook an
independent review of inventory flow and
operating processes. The review highlighted
significant opportunities to improve supply
chain performance and several changes are
now underway.
These include changing international freight
partners to improve visibility and control
across inbound freight and simplify the flow
of containers into New Zealand. The Group is
continuing to optimise RELEX, its forecasting
and replenishment platform introduced in
FY25.
Early progress can be seen in lower
inventory levels and improved working
capital performance. However, significant
opportunities remain and improving supply
chain performance will continue to be a
priority.
International sourcing
The Warehouse Group maintains sourcing hubs
in China, Bangladesh and India, supporting
the development and supply of private-label
products across its retail brands.
These hubs work closely with suppliers on
product development, quality and production,
providing visibility across the supply chain and
supporting ethical sourcing standards. Their
local expertise helps the Group deliver quality
products, value and reliability for customers.
Global freight management
Global freight markets remained volatile
throughout the year. Higher fuel costs,
geopolitical instability and pressure across key
shipping routes created uncertainty across
international supply chains.
The Group continues to work closely with
suppliers and logistics partners as conditions
evolve, to maintain product availability and
manage disruption and cost.
Distribution Centre
2726
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Our Brands | The Warehouse
Our
Brands
For 44 years, The
Warehouse has
helped make the
desirable affordable
for all New
Zealanders.
The Warehouse recorded sales
of $1,774.9 million in FY26,
down 2.3% on FY25, which
included an additional trading
week. Sales increased 0.6% on
a comparative 52-week same-
store basis.
In FY26, economic recovery
remained slow and higher
fuel prices continued to
impact household budgets
and shopping habits. On a
comparable 52-week basis
store traffic declined slightly
by 0.3% during the year as
customers shopped with
more intention, with units sold
increasing 1.7% and basket
value increasing 0.8%.
The Warehouse’s operating
margin improved 30 basis
points for the full year, with
category gains led by Home
and Apparel. Stronger
product ranges supported
more full-price sales and less
clearance activity, reducing
the operating loss from $12.2
million in FY25 to $7.5 million
in FY26.
On a 52-week basis Apparel
returned to growth with sales
increasing 0.4%, driven by
growth in children’s essentials,
seasonal womenswear and
footwear, and men’s essentials.
Beauty gained significant
momentum at The Warehouse
in FY26, with sales increasing
5.2% as customers responded
to broader ranges and better
presentation in stores.
Toys delivered another record-
breaking year, with sales up
3.2% and units sold up 5.7%.
The Warehouse remains
New Zealand’s number one
preferred toy retailer for a
second year in a row.
Work began on a future
flagship store approach, while
selective store investment
focused on getting the basics
right, including lighting,
flooring and racking upgrades
in priority locations, alongside
improvements to visual
merchandising in Home,
Apparel and Health & Beauty.
More family fun and
experiences were brought
back into stores during the
year, from the return of
children’s shopping trolleys
and much-loved mascots The
Warehouse Kiwi and Allie the
Alien, to Santa in larger stores
at Christmas.
In-store Net Promoter Score
was 71.3, down 2.6 points from
FY25, showing there is more to
do to make The Warehouse a
more exciting and easier place
to shop.
In March, plans were
announced for a new store
in Mangawhai, opening in
late-2027. Now a fast-growing,
year-round community,
Mangawhai will become home
to the first new The Warehouse
store since Wānaka opened in
2023.
The website and app
remained important sources
of inspiration. Online sales
represented 4.4% of sales,
down from 4.6% in FY25. The
website recorded 54 million
visits and The Warehouse
app had around 440,000
downloads during the year.
In June, The Warehouse
partnered with DoorDash to
make thousands of products
available on the platform for
same-day delivery.
In FY26, focus shifted to The
Warehouse brand. A customer
segmentation review used
spending data and research to
identify opportunities to grow,
protect and regain share. Paid
media investment was paused
while channel effectiveness
was reviewed and a longer-
term brand strategy
developed, leading to the
launch of This Is Warehouse
Country at the beginning
of FY27. The new platform
celebrates The Warehouse’s
place in Kiwi life since 1982.
Community remains central to
the brand, with Red Bag sales
generating $1.35 million for
national charity partners and
local community groups.
84
Stores
Online sales
Basket valueUnits sold
FY25: 4.6%
4.4%
0.8%1.7%
Foot traffic
1
52-week same-
store sales
0.3%
0.6%
1. Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same-store basis
$1.8b
Sales
Down 2.3% on FY25
Operating loss
$(7.5)m
FY25: $(12.2)m
2928
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Our Brands | Warehouse Stationery
Our
Brands
For more than 30
years, Warehouse
Stationery has helped
New Zealanders
work, study, create
and connect.
FY26 marked a strong step
forward for Warehouse
Stationery, with the brand
returning to sales growth and
almost doubling operating
profit.
Warehouse Stationery
recorded sales of $227.6
million in FY26, up 0.7% on
FY25. Sales increased by 2.0%
on a comparative 52-week
same-store basis. Online
sales represented 7.1% of
Warehouse Stationery sales
in FY26, broadly in line with
FY25. Customers responded
positively to the offer, with
units sold increasing 3.4%
and average basket value
increasing 0.5%. Growth was
driven by both standalone
stores and stores operating
within The Warehouse
network.
Lower clearance and more
disciplined pricing contributed
to an operating profit
improvement of 340 basis
points compared with FY25,
making Warehouse Stationery
the Group’s strongest-
performing retail brand by
operating margin.
Margins strengthened through
the second half, contributing
to an operating profit of $15.9
million up 93.4% on FY25.
Growth was supported by
strong performances across
Warehouse Stationery’s key
categories. Print & Create
sales increased 13.8% on a
comparable 52-week basis,
Art & Craft sales increased
6.7%, and Office Furniture
sales increased 5.5%. Together,
these categories reinforce
Warehouse Stationery’s
position as a destination for
creativity, education and
business services.
The Warehouse Stationery
store network expanded
during the year. A new
standalone store opened
in central Wellington in
October, featuring self-service
print kiosks and an e-waste
recycling service.
At the beginning of FY27,
Warehouse Stationery
opened a new standalone
store in Whitianga, bringing
the brand’s full range of
products and services to the
local community and wider
Coromandel region.
Warehouse Stationery
recorded an in-store Net
Promoter Score of 85.3 in FY26.
While below the 88.8 achieved
in FY25, it remains an excellent
result and demonstrates
consistently high levels of
service across the store
network.
Connecting with local
communities is an important
part of the Warehouse
Stationery brand. Through Get
Creating New Zealand, stores
across the country hosted a
range of creative challenges
and hands-on craft activities
during the school holidays for
children and families.
Back to School is one of
Warehouse Stationery’s key
annual campaigns, engaging
schools and parents across
New Zealand and helping
them prepare for the new
school year with great value
and convenience during a
busy time.
Supporting New Zealand’s
small and medium-sized
businesses is an important
part of the Warehouse
Stationery offer. BizRewards
provides business customers
with access to exclusive offers
and benefits when shopping
with Warehouse Stationery.
67
Stores
Online sales
FY25: 7.0%
7.1 %
Foot traffic
1
0.2%
42 stores within a
The Warehouse
Basket valueUnits sold
0.5%3.4%
1. Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same-store basis
52-week same-
store sales
2.0%
$227.6m
Sales
Up 0.7% on FY25
Operating profit
$15.9m
FY25: $8.2m
3130
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Our Brands | Noel Leeming
For 53 years, Noel
Leeming has helped
Kiwis get the most
out of technology
and appliances.
Sales were $1,017.4 million,
down 2.0% on FY25. On a
comparable 52-week basis,
sales declined 0.2% and
same-store sales declined
0.5%. Customers purchased
fewer items during the year,
but spent more when they
did, with store traffic down
slightly by 0.5%, units sold
decreasing 3.9% and basket
value increasing 4.2%.
Operating margin improved
100 basis points during the
year, reflecting a disciplined
approach to pricing and
promotional activity. This
contributed to operating profit
increasing to $21.8 million,
up $10.1 million on FY25, and
the largest contribution from
any of the Group’s brands to
the improvement in Group
operating profit.
Appliances delivered the
strongest growth during the
year, with sales increasing
11.2% on a 52-week basis,
led by whiteware and small
appliances. Cellular sales
increased 4.7% and computers
and storage increased 10.6%,
supported by new brands
and customer demand linked
to the Windows 10 and 3G
transitions. Services, including
delivery, installation and Tech
Solutions, grew 10.1% during
the year.
Major campaigns including
Black Friday and Christmas
performed well, while Boxing
Day was softer, in line with
broader retail conditions. The
brand continued to build
personality and engagement
through its marketing, helping
grow Noel Leeming’s digital
channels, with online sales
increasing to 13.1% of sales, up
from 11.3% in FY25. The website
recorded 118.8 million visits up
from 38 million in FY25, and
the Noel Leeming app had
86,600 downloads during the
year compared to 47,800 in
FY25.
Noel Leeming continued to
invest in its store network and
customer experience. The
brand relocated its Palmerston
North store to more modern
site. Fixtures and materials
from the previous store
were reused, and e-waste
and mobile phone recycling
services were introduced for
the local community. Plans
were announced for a new
store in Mangawhai, opening
in late-2027 to serve the
growing community there.
In May 2026, Noel Leeming
announced its return to
Queen Street in Auckland.
Opening in September 2026,
the new concept store offers
demonstrations, events,
product launches and
hands-on experiences.
Expert advice and service
remain at the heart of the Noel
Leeming customer experience.
Team members strengthened
their product and service
knowledge through NOELedge
Academies, supplier training
and the Passionate Promoters
programme, helping Noel
Leeming maintain a solid
in-store Net Promoter Score
of 76.1 in FY26, compared with
76.9 in FY25.
Noel Leeming helps customers
extend the life of technology
and appliances through
trade-in and recycling
programmes. Customers can
trade in eligible smartphones,
laptops, tablets and
smartwatches in exchange for
a Noel Leeming gift card, and
can now purchase refurbished
devices.
Through its partnership
with TechCollect NZ, Noel
Leeming offers e-waste
recycling. Customers recycled
approximately 169 tonnes
of e-waste through the
programme during FY26, with
Hastings, Gore and Porirua
joining the network and
increasing the number of
participating stores from 29
to 32.
Our
Brands
66
Stores
Online sales
FY25: 11.3%
13.1%
Basket valueUnits sold
4.2%3.9%
Foot traffic
1
0.5%
1. Foot traffic is calculated on a 52 week same-store basis
52-week same-
store sales
0.5%
$1.02b
Sales
Down 2.0% on a
53-week FY25
Operating profit
$21.8m
FY25: $11.7m
32
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026
Consolidated Income Statement 34
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 34
Consolidated Balance Sheet 35
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 36
Reconciliation of Operating Cash Flows 36
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 37
1.1 Reporting entity 38
1.2 Compliance statement 38
1.3 Basis of preparation 38
1.4 Changes in accounting policy information and interpretations 38
1.5 Reporting period 38
1.6 Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions 38
1.7 Non-GAAP financial information 38
2.0 Segment Information 39
2.1 Operating performance 39
2.2 Adjustment for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases) 39
3.0 Income and Expenses 40
3.1 Other income 40
3.2 Employee expense 40
3.3 Depreciation and amortisation expense 40
3.4 Other operating expense 40
3.5 Auditors’ fees 40
3.6 Net other interest expense 40
4.0 Taxation 41
4.1 Taxation - income statement 41
4.2 Taxation - balance sheet current taxation asset 41
4.3 Taxation - balance sheet deferred taxation 41
5.0 Adjusted Net Profit 42
6.0 Earnings Per Share 42
7.0 Dividends 42
8.0 Working Capital 43
8.1 Inventory 43
8.2 Trade and other receivables 43
8.3 Trade and other payables 43
8.4 Provisions 44
9.0 Non Current Assets 44
9.1 Property, plant and equipment 44
9.2 Intangible assets 45
10.0 Lease Liabilities and Right of Use Assets 46
10.1 Rights of use assets 46
10.2 Lease liabilities 46
10.3 Lease liability maturity analysis 46
11.0 Equity 47
11.1 Capital management 47
11.2 Bank and debt facilities 47
11.3 Contributed equity 47
11.4 Reserves 47
11.5 Minority interest 48
12.0 Financial Risk Management 49
12.1 Financial risk factors 49
12.2 Derivative financial instruments 49
12.3 Liquidity risk 50
12.4 Credit risk 50
12.5 Market risk 50
13.0 Key Management 51
14.0 Commitments 51
15.0 Contingent Liabilities 51
16.0 Related Parties 51
Contents
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS PageOPERATING ASSETS AND LIABILITIES Page
FINANCING AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE
FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
OTHER DISCLOSURES
BASIS OF PREPARATION
FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
Financial
Statements
Financial Statements
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
The financial statements have been presented in a style which makes them less complex and more relevant to shareholders. The note disclosures have been grouped
into six sections: ‘basis of preparation’, ‘financial performance’, ‘operating assets and liabilities’, ‘financing and capital structure’, ‘financial risk management’ and ‘other
disclosures’. Each section sets out the material accounting policy information in grey text boxes applied in producing the relevant notes, along with details of any key
judgements and estimates used. The purpose of this format is to provide readers with a clearer understanding of what drives financial performance of the Group.
These financial statements have been approved for issue by the Board of Directors on 29 September 2026.
The Warehouse Group Limited is a limited liability company incorporated and domiciled in New Zealand.
The address of its registered office is 26 The Warehouse Way, Northcote, Auckland 0627, New Zealand.
John Journee
Board Chair
29 September 2026
Dean Hamilton
Audit and Risk Committee Chair
29 September 2026
33
Financial Statements
Consolidated Income Statement
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Retail sales
2.1
3,027,587 3,086,725
Cost of retail goods sold
8.1
(2,041,000)(2,091,643)
Gross profit
986,587
995,082
Other income
3.1
14,680 14,314
Employee expense
3.2
(519,641)(526,520)
Depreciation and amortisation expense
3.3
(146,896)(156,524)
Other operating expense
3.4
(272,421)(285,836)
Operating profit
2.1
62,309 40,516
Unusual items
5.0
(5,716)-
Earnings before interest and tax
56,593 40,516
Interest on leases
10.2
(36,945)(36,847)
Net other interest expense
3.6
(2,659)(6,668)
Profit/(loss) before tax
16,989 (2,999)
Income tax benefit/(expense)
4.1
(5,463)572
Net profit/(loss) for the period
11,526 (2,427)
Attributable to:
Shareholders of the parent
11,234 (2,764)
Minority interests
11.5
292 337
11,526 (2,427)
Basic and diluted earnings per share attributable to shareholders of the parent
6.0
3.3 cents (0.8) cents
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Net profit/(loss) for the period
11,526 (2,427)
Items that may be reclassified subsequently to the income statement
Movement in foreign currency translation reserve
265 -
Movement in derivative cash flow hedges
1,641 (10,301)
Tax relating to movement in hedge reserve
(459)2,884
Other comprehensive income/(loss)
1,447 (7,417)
Total comprehensive income/(loss)
12,973 (9,844)
Attributable to:
Shareholders of the parent
12,681 (10,181)
Minority interest11.5
292 337
Total comprehensive income/(loss)
12,973 (9,844)
Consolidated Balance Sheet
As at 2 August 2026
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
ASSETS
Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents
11.2
41,883 39,206
Trade and other receivables
8.2
77,505 69,871
Inventory
8.1
438,819 476,718
Derivative financial instruments
12.2
2,618 3,908
Current taxation
4.2
2,329 2,473
Total current assets
563,154 592,176
Non current assets
Trade and other receivables
8.2
17,754 22,088
Property, plant and equipment
9.1
135,286 155,078
Intangible assets
9.2
119,605 140,090
Right of use assets
10.1
583,551 590,187
Deferred taxation
4.3
89,020 94,278
Total non current assets
945,216 1,001,721
Total assets
1,508,370 1,593,897
LIABILITIES
Current liabilities
Borrowings
11.2
58,900 135,300
Trade and other payables
8.3
362,362 376,758
Derivative financial instruments
12.2
2,672 3,768
Lease liabilities
10.3
97,485 92,522
Provisions
8.4
45,707 42,926
Total current liabilities
567,126 651,274
Non current liabilities
Lease liabilities
10.3
607,843 621,317
Provisions
8.4
20,260 20,810
Total non current liabilities
628,103 642,127
Total liabilities
1,195,229 1,293,401
Net assets
313,141 300,496
EQUITY
Contributed equity
11.3
360,235 360,235
Reserves
11.4
611 (836)
Retained earnings
(48,795)(60,029)
Total equity attributable to shareholders
312,051 299,370
Minority interest
11.5
1,090 1,126
Total equity
313,141 300,496
3534
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash received from customers
3,039,467 3,099,203
Payments to suppliers and employees
(2,805,717)(2,982,438)
Income tax paid
4.2
(532)(692)
Interest paid
(39,705)(43,750)
Net cash flows from operating activities
193,513 72,323
Cash flows from investing activities
Proceeds from sale of property, plant & equipment
43 160
Purchase of property, plant & equipment and computer software
(19,446)(12,604)
Net cash flows from investing activities
(19,403)(12,444)
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds/(repayments) from borrowings
(76,400)52,400
Lease principal repayments
(94,705)(104,882)
Dividends paid to minority shareholders
(328)(395)
Net cash flows from financing activities
(171,433)(52,877)
Net cash inflow
2,677 7,002
Opening cash position
39,206 32,204
Closing cash position
11.2
41,883 39,206
Reconciliation of Operating Cash Flows
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Net profit/(loss) for the period
11,526 (2,427)
Non cash items
Depreciation and amortisation expense
3.3
146,896 156,524
Work in progress written off
4,973 -
Movement in deferred taxation
4.1
4,795 (1,570)
Total non cash items
156,664 154,954
4.1
Items classified as investing or financing activities
Loss on disposal/impairment of plant, equipment and software
2,272 187
Gain on lease terminations
2.2
(12)-
Total investing and financing adjustments
2,260 187
Changes in assets and liabilities
Trade and other receivables
(3,300)7,263
Inventory
37,899 (4,590)
Trade and other payables
(13,911)(84,211)
Provisions
2,231 841
Current tax
144 306
Total changes in assets and liabilities
23,063 (80,391)
Net cash flows from operating activities
193,513 72,323
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
Note
Share
Capital
Treasury
Shares
Hedge
Reserves
Foreign
Currency
Translation
Reserve
Retained
Earnings
Minority
Interest
Total
Equity
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
Balance at the beginning of the period
365,517 (5,282)(1,056)220 (60,029)1,126 300,496
Profit for the period
- - - - 11,234 292 11,526
Movement in foreign currency translation reserve
- - - 265 - - 265
Movement in derivative cash flow hedges
- - 1,641- - - 1,641
Tax relating to movement in hedge reserve
- - (459)- - - (459)
Total comprehensive income
- - 1,182 265 11,234 292 12,973
Contributions by and distributions to owners
Dividends paid
11.5
- - - - - (328)(328)
Balance at the end of the period
365,517 (5,282)126 485 (48,795)1,090 313,141
(note: 11.3)(note: 11.3)(note: 11.4)(note: 11.4)(note: 11.5)
For the 53 week period ended 3 August 2025
Balance at the beginning of the period
365,517 (5,282)6,361 220 (57,265)1,184 310,735
Profit/(loss) for the period
- - - - (2,764)337 (2,427)
Movement in foreign currency translation reserve
- - - - - - -
Movement in derivative cash flow hedges
- - (10,301)- - - (10,301)
Tax relating to movement in hedge reserve
- - 2,884 - - - 2,884
Total comprehensive income/(loss)
- - (7,417)- (2,764)337 (9,844)
Contributions by and distributions to owners
Dividends paid
11.5
- - - - - (395)(395)
Balance at the end of the period
365,517 (5,282)(1,056)220 (60,029)1,126 300,496
(note: 11.3) (note: 11.3) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.4) (note: 11.5)
3736
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
Notes to the Financial Statements - Basis of Preparation
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
1.0 BASIS OF PREPARATION
1.1 Reporting entity
The Warehouse Group Limited (the Company) and its subsidiaries (together
the Group) operate in the New Zealand retail sector. The Company is a limited
liability company incorporated and domiciled in New Zealand. The Group is
registered under the Companies Act 1993 and is an FMC reporting entity under
Part 7 of the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013. The address of the Company’s
registered office is 26 The Warehouse Way, Northcote, Auckland 0627, New
Zealand. The Company is listed on the New Zealand Exchange (NZX).
1.2 Compliance statement
These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with New Zealand
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (NZ GAAP), the Financial Markets
Conduct Act 2013 and the NZX Listing Rules. They comply with New Zealand
Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards (NZ IFRS), other
applicable Financial Reporting Standards and authoritative pronouncements of
the External Reporting Board, as appropriate for for-profit entities. The financial
statements also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards
Accounting Standards (IFRS Accounting Standards) issued by the International
Accounting Standards Board (IASB).
1.3 Basis of preparation
The measurement basis adopted in the preparation of these financial
statements is historical cost, as modified by the remeasurement of certain
assets and liabilities at fair value. The financial statements are presented in New
Zealand dollars and all amounts are rounded to the nearest thousand dollars,
unless otherwise stated.
Material accounting policy information and other explanatory information
applied in the preparation of these financial statements are set out in the
accompanying notes where an accounting policy choice exists under NZ IFRS,
where the policy is new or has changed, where the policy is specific to the
Group’s operations, or where the information is considered material to an
understanding of the financial statements. Where NZ IFRS does not permit
an accounting policy choice, the Group has applied the requirements of the
relevant standards and has not separately disclosed the accounting policy.
The consolidated financial statements comprise the financial statements of the
Company and its subsidiaries. Material subsidiaries at balance date are listed
below.
Percentage ownership
Name of entityPrincipal activity2026 2025
The Warehouse LimitedRetail100 100
Eldamos Investments LimitedProperty100 100
The Warehouse Nominees
Limited
Investment100 100
Group structure
There were no changes to the Group’s legal structure during 2026. Subsequent
to balance date, the Group commenced the process of liquidating TWHouse
Sourcing Private Limited in India following the cessation of its sourcing
operations as part of the Group restructuring programme (refer note 5). The
liquidation is not expected to have a material impact on the Group’s financial
position or performance.
1.4 Changes in accounting policy information and
interpretations
There were no new accounting standards, amendments or interpretations that
became effective for the Group during 2026 that had a material impact on the
Group’s accounting policies, recognition, measurement, financial position or
financial performance.
The Group has not early adopted any standards, amendments or interpretations
that have been issued but are not yet effective.
In May 2024, the IASB issued NZ IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial
Statements, which replaces NZ IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements. NZ
IFRS 18 is effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January
2027 and will therefore be mandatory for the Group from 2028. The standard
introduces new presentation and disclosure requirements for the primary
financial statements and management-defined performance measures. The
Group is currently assessing the impact of the standard and does not currently
expect a material impact on the recognition or measurement of assets, liabilities,
income or expenses.
Climate change
The Group considered the potential financial statement impacts of climate-
related risks and opportunities as part of the preparation of its sustainability
reporting. This assessment included consideration of whether climate-
related matters affected key accounting estimates and judgements, including
impairment testing, useful economic lives of assets, provisions, asset valuations
and the recoverability of assets.
Based on the assessment performed, the Group concluded that climate-related
matters did not have a material impact on the recognition or measurement
of assets and liabilities at balance date, nor did they result in any material
adjustments to the judgements, estimates and assumptions used in preparing
the financial statements. Accordingly, no climate-related matters were
identified that required specific disclosure beyond those included in the Group’s
Sustainability Report.
1.5 Reporting period
These financial statements cover the 52 week period from 4 August 2025 to
2 August 2026. Comparative information relates to the 53 week period from
29 July 2024 to 3 August 2025. The Group operates on a weekly reporting cycle,
resulting in a 53 week reporting period approximately every five to six years.
1.6 Material accounting judgements, estimates and
assumptions
The preparation of the financial statements requires the Group to make
judgements, estimates and assumptions that effect the reported amounts of
assets and liabilities at balance date and the reported amounts of revenues and
expenses during the year. Judgements and estimates which are material to the
financial statements are found in the following notes:
(a) Lease liabilities and right of use assets (notes 10.1 and 10.2)
(b) Inventory (note 8.1)
(c) Property, plant and equipment (note 9.1)
(d) Intangible assets and tax losses (note 9.2)
1.7 Non-GAAP financial information
The Group uses operating profit, EBIT, unusual items and adjusted net profit to
describe financial performance, as these measures provide useful information
on the underlying performance of the business. These non-GAAP measures
are not defined by NZ IFRS and may not be comparable with similarly titled
measures reported by other entities. The Group’s policies for unusual items and
adjusted net profit are set out in note 5.0.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
2.0 SEGMENT INFORMATION
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
2.1 Operating performance
Retail salesOperating profit/(loss)Retail operating margin
Note202620252026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
The Warehouse
1,774,873 1,816,475 (7,529)(12,247)-0.4% -0.7%
Warehouse Stationery
227,630 226,036 15,903 8,217 7.0% 3.6%
Warehouse segment
2,002,503 2,042,511 8,374 (4,030)0.4% -0.2%
Noel Leeming
1,017,353 1,038,058 21,758 11,667 2.1% 1.1%
Other Group operations
12,464 11,578 (7,567)(6,326)
Inter-segment eliminations
(4,733)(5,422)- -
Group
3,027,587 3,086,725 22,565 1,311 0.7% 0.0%
Adjustments for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases)
2.2
39,744 39,205
Operating profit
62,309 40,516
Unusual items
5.0
(5,716)-
Earnings before interest and tax
56,593 40,516
Retail sales
Retail sales are recognised when the customer receives the goods which typically occurs at the point of sale for instore sales, or where the goods are purchased
online, when the goods have been delivered to the customer. Revenue from the sale of goods is recognised at the amount of the transaction price when all
performance obligations have been met and the customer obtains control of the goods.
Operating segments
The Group has three retail brands trading in the New Zealand retail sector. These brands form the basis of internal reporting used by senior management and the
Board of Directors to monitor and assess performance and assist with strategy decisions. Brand trading performance is assessed using operating profit, which is a
non-GAAP measure that excludes the impacts of NZ IFRS 16 Leases, and is considered a better measure of underlying brand performance. Assets are not allocated to
operating segments and the balance sheet is managed and internally reported on a consolidated basis to the senior management and the Board of Directors.
Customers can purchase products from the three main retail chains either online or through the Group’s physical retail store network. At year end the Group’s
physical store network consists of 84 The Warehouse stores, 67 Warehouse Stationery stores (including 42 stores trading within The Warehouse stores), and 66
Noel Leeming stores. The Warehouse predominantly sells general merchandise and apparel, Noel Leeming sells technology and appliance products and Warehouse
Stationery sells stationery products.
Other Group operations include a property company, a chocolate factory and the residual cost of unallocated support office functions.
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
2.2 Adjustment for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases)
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Pre NZ IFRS 16 lease expense
132,580 132,538
Right of use asset amortisation
10.1
(92,848)(93,333)
Gain on lease terminations
12 -
Impact on operating profit
2.1
39,744 39,205
Lease liability interest
10.2
(36,945)(36,847)
Impact on net profit before tax
5.0
2,799 2,358
3938
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
3.0 INCOME AND EXPENSES
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
3.1 Other income
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Tenancy rents received
2,079 2,328
Retail media
9,133 8,702
Other
3,468 3,284
Other income
14,680 14,314
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
3.2 Employee expense
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Wages and salaries
509,112 522,103
Directors' fees
13.0
767 772
Performance based compensation
9,762 3,645
Employee expense
519,641 526,520
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
3.3 Depreciation and amortisation expense
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Property, plant and equipment
9.1
32,826 40,325
Computer software
9.2
21,222 22,866
Right of use assets
10.1
92,848 93,333
Depreciation and amortisation expense
146,896 156,524
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
3.4 Other operating expense
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Other operating expenses include:
Bad debt and movement in provision for doubtful debts expense
1,155 (304)
Loss on disposal/impairment of plant, equipment and software
2,272 187
Net foreign currency exchange loss/(profit)
(3)273
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
3.5 Auditors’ fees
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Audit and review of the financial statements
Auditing the Group financial statements
810 803
Reviewing the half year financial statements
180 118
Audit of overseas subsidiary financial statements
18 19
1,008 940
Other agreed-upon procedure engagements
Annual shareholder meeting voting
12 10
Negative Pledge compliance certificate
12 12
24 22
Total fees paid to PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC)
1,032 962
All fees are paid to PwC New Zealand, with the exception of $18,000 (2025: $19,000) paid to PwC India for the audit of the Group’s subsidiary in India.
Audit fees - corporate governance
In accordance with the Group’s policies regarding audit governance and independence, other non-audit services are approved by the Group’s Audit and
Risk Committee. The Group’s policy permits the audit firm to provide non-audit services that are not considered to be in conflict with the preservation of the
independence of the auditor, subject to Audit and Risk Committee approval.
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
3.6 Net other interest expense
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Interest on deposits and use of money interest received
(142)(319)
Interest on borrowings
2,801 6,987
Net other interest expense
2,659 6,668
4.0 TAXATION
A reconciliation between the tax expense recognised in the income statement and tax expense calculated per the statutory income tax rate is detailed below.
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
4.1 Taxation - income statement
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Profit/(loss) before tax
16,989 (2,999)
Taxation calculated at 28%
4,757 (840)
Adjusted for the tax effect of:
Other non deductible expenditure
603 230
Income tax under provided in prior year
103 38
Income tax (benefit)/expense
5,463 (572)
Income tax (benefit)/expense comprises:
Current year income tax payable
4.2
668 998
Deferred taxation
4.3
4,795 (1,570)
Income tax (benefit)/expense
5,463 (572)
Income taxation
The income tax expense for the period is the tax payable on the current year’s taxable income based on the income tax rate adjusted by changes in deferred tax
assets and liabilities attributable to temporary differences between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the financial statements.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised for temporary differences at the tax rates expected to apply when the assets are recovered or liabilities are
settled, based on those tax rates which are enacted or substantively enacted. The relevant tax rates are applied to the cumulative amounts of deductible and
taxable temporary differences to measure the deferred tax asset or liability.
Deferred tax assets are recognised for deductible temporary differences and unused tax losses only if it is probable that future taxable amounts will be available
to utilise those temporary differences and losses. Deferred tax liabilities and assets are not recognised for temporary differences between the carrying amount
and tax bases of investments in subsidiaries and associates where the parent entity is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and
it is probable that the differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.
Current and deferred tax balances attributable to amounts recognised in equity are similarly recognised in equity.
Goods and services tax (GST)
The income statement and statement of cash flows have been prepared so that all components are stated exclusive of GST. All items in the balance sheet are
stated net of GST with the exception of receivables and payables which include GST invoiced.
Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development’s Pillar Two
The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) has introduced GloBE Pillar Two model rules which aim to implement a minimum global tax
rate of 15 per cent across all jurisdictions.
The New Zealand Government has enacted legislation to implement the OECD Pillar Two Rules which are effective for the Group from August 2025. The Group also
operates in other countries which apply the Pillar Two Rules with effect for the Group from August 2024. The Group has applied the exception to recognising and
disclosing information about deferred tax assets and liabilities related to Pillar Two income taxes.
The Group has undertaken a high-level assessment to determine the Group’s potential exposure to Pillar Two top-up taxes. Based on the assessment, it is expected
that the Group will satisfy the relevant criteria to rely on the Pillar Two transitional safe harbour rules and is not expected to have exposure to Pillar Two top up
taxes. The Group is continuing to monitor the developments of the Pillar Two legislation in countries that the Group operates in and assess the impact of Pillar Two
legislation on its future financial performance.
The following table details the movement in the current income tax asset during the current and prior year.
4.2 Taxation - balance sheet current taxation asset
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Opening balance
2,473 2,779
Foreign exchange movement
(8)-
Current year income tax payable
4.1
(668)(998)
Income tax paid
532 692
Closing balance
2,329 2,473
4.3 Taxation - balance sheet
deferred taxation
Opening Balance
Credited/(expensed) to the
income statement
Credited/(expensed) to
equityClosing Balance
Note20262025202620252026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Lease liabilities
201,979 205,838 (2,643)(3,859)- - 199,336 201,979
Inventory
10,494 10,967 2,042 (473)- - 12,536 10,494
Property, plant, equipment & software
2,774 6,873 1,806 (4,099)- - 4,580 2,774
Employee provisions
13,842 14,074 (499)(232)- - 13,343 13,842
Tax losses
9.2
34,617 25,349 (7,534)9,268 - - 27,083 34,617
Derivatives
411 - - - (411)411 - 411
Other
5,357 6,327 853 (970)(4)- 6,206 5,357
Gross deferred tax asset
269,474 269,428 (5,975)(365)(415)411 263,084 269,474
Right of use assets
(165,252)(168,451)1,858 3,199 - - (163,394)(165,252)
Brand
(4,340)(4,340)- - - - (4,340)(4,340)
Derivatives
- (2,473)- - (48)2,473 (48)-
Other
(5,604)(4,340)(678)(1,264)- - (6,282)(5,604)
Gross deferred tax liability
(175,196)(179,604)1,180 1,935 (48)2,473 (174,064)(175,196)
Net deferred tax asset
94,278 89,824 (4,795)1,570 (463)2,884 89,020 94,278
(note: 4.1) (note: 4.1)
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
4140
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
5.0 ADJUSTED NET PROFIT
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
Adjusted net profit reconciliationNote20262025
$ 000$ 000
Net profit/(loss) attributable to shareholders of the parent
11,234 (2,764)
Add back:
Unusual items: Restructure costs
5,716 -
Adjustments for NZ IFRS 16 (Leases)
2.2
(2,799)(2,358)
Income tax relating to above items
(620)660
Adjusted net profit/(loss)
13,531 (4,462)
Certain transactions can make the comparison of profits between years difficult. The Group uses adjusted net profit as a key indicator of performance and
considers it a better measure of underlying business performance. Adjusted net profit makes allowance for the after tax effect of unusual items which are not
directly connected with the Group’s normal trading activities. The Group defines unusual items as any gains or losses from property disposals, goodwill and brand
impairment, costs relating to business acquisitions or disposals, ineffective hedge derivatives and costs connected with restructuring the Group. Following the
adoption of NZ IFRS 16 the non-cash impact relating to the lease accounting standard is also excluded from adjusted net profit.
Restructure costs
In November 2025, the Group commenced a cost reset programme aimed at improving profitability and reducing operating costs. Restructure costs comprise head
office redundancy costs associated with the co-sourcing of selected corporate and administrative functions with Tata Consultancy Services, as well as the closure of
TWHouse Sourcing Private Limited, the Group’s Indian subsidiary.
6.0 EARNINGS PER SHARE
(52 Weeks)(53 Weeks)
Earnings per share calculationNote20262025
Net profit/(loss) attributable to shareholders of the parent ($000s)
11,234 (2,764)
Adjusted net profit/(loss) ($000s)
5.0
13,531 (4,462)
Basic and diluted
Weighted average number of ordinary shares (net of treasury shares) on issue (000s)
345,354 345,354
Earnings per share (cents)
3.3 (0.8)
Adjusted earnings per share (cents)
3.9 (1.3)
Earnings per share (EPS) is the amount of post tax profit attributable to each share. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing net profit attributable to shareholders by
the weighted average number of ordinary shares (net of treasury shares) outstanding during the year. Adjusted basic EPS is similarly calculated using adjusted net
profit as the numerator.
The Group did not hold any potentially dilutive share rights throughout the current financial year or at balance date last year.
7.0 DIVIDENDS
Dividend policy
The Group declares two dividends in a typical year, the first in respect of the half year (interim dividend) and second in respect of the full year result (final dividend).
Dividends are declared at the discretion of the Board and subject to trading performance, market conditions and liquidity requirements. The Group’s dividend policy
is to distribute at least 70% of the Group’s full year adjusted net profit. Notwithstanding the Group’s adjusted net profit of $13.5 million (refer note 5.0), the Board did
not declare a final dividend for 2026. While the performance improved during the year, the Board determined that retaining capital to support the Group’s financial
recovery and strategic investment priorities was appropriate in the circumstances.
Imputation credit account20262025
$ 000$ 000
Imputation credits at balance date available for future distribution
107,856 107,729
Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
8.0 WORKING CAPITAL
8.1 Inventory
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Finished goods
397,891 412,409
Inventory provisions
(18,883)(15,210)
Retail stock
379,008 397,199
Goods in transit from overseas
59,811 79,519
Inventory
438,819 476,718
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is calculated using a weighted average method and includes expenditure incurred
to purchase the inventory and transport it to its current location. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price of the inventory in the ordinary course of
business less costs necessary to make the sale. The cost of inventories consumed during the period are recognised as an expense and included in cost of goods
sold in the income statement.
Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions
Assessing provisions for inventory obsolescence, net realisable value and shrinkage involves making estimates and judgements in relation to future selling prices
and expected shrinkage rates between the most recent store stock counts and balance date. Shrinkage is a reduction in inventory due to shoplifting, employee theft,
record keeping errors and supplier fraud. The Group considers a wide range of factors including historical data, current trends and product information from buyers
as part of the process to determine the appropriate value of these provisions.
Goods in transit from overseas
Goods in transit are recognised when control of the goods passes to the Group. Control is determined based on the Group’s substantive rights over the inventory,
including its ability to direct the use and movement of the goods and obtain the associated economic benefits.
8.2 Trade and other receivables
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Trade receivables
34,207 29,512
Prepayments
39,618 39,760
Rebate accruals and other debtors
21,434 22,687
Trade and other receivables
95,259 91,959
Less non current prepayments
(17,754)(22,088)
Current trade and other receivables
77,505 69,871
Trade receivables arise from sales made to customers on credit or through the collection of rebates from suppliers not otherwise deducted from suppliers’
payable accounts. Trade receivables are non-interest bearing and are generally on 30 to 60 day terms. Trade receivables are recognised based on the value of
the invoice sent to the customer and adjusted for expected credit losses to provide for future unrecovered debts. The expected collectability of trade and other
receivables is reviewed on an ongoing basis.
8.3 Trade and other payables
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Local trade creditors and accruals
205,475 224,514
Foreign currency trade creditors
71,588 75,223
Goods in transit creditors
33,378 35,236
Capital expenditure creditors
2,629 1,028
Goods and services tax
26,815 17,404
Reward schemes and gift vouchers
13,572 13,589
Payroll accruals
8,905 9,764
Trade and other payables
362,362 376,758
Trade payables represent liabilities for goods and services provided to the Group prior to the end of financial year which are unpaid. The amounts are normally
unsecured and local creditors are typically settled within 60 days and foreign creditors up to 120 days of recognition. Due to the short term nature of these
payables, the carrying value approximates their fair value.
Foreign currency trade creditors
The Group has a supplier financing arrangement for foreign currency trade creditors with one of its banks. The Group provides the bank and the supplier with
visibility of invoices it has approved for payment, which allows suppliers choosing to enter the financing arrangement to factor selected invoices and accelerate
settlement from the bank before the invoice due date. The Group is not party to the financing leg of the arrangement and are not aware of the exact terms and
conditions negotiated between the bank and our suppliers. The payment terms of the Group’s foreign currency trade creditors do not exceed 120 days from the
invoice date and invoice payment terms (including security) do not vary between those where suppliers have factored their receivables from those who have not.
The Group classifies the amounts factored by suppliers as foreign currency trade creditors because the characteristics of the amounts payable by the Group are
the same as its other foreign currency trade creditors. At balance date $58.5 million (2025: $64.0 million) of foreign currency trade creditors were part of a supplier
financing arrangement.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Performance
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
4342
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
8.4 Provisions
CurrentNon currentTotal
202620252026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Employee entitlements
40,474 38,274 13,783 14,252 54,257 52,526
Make good provision
1,465 937 6,477 6,558 7,942 7,495
Sales return provision
3,768 3,715 - - 3,768 3,715
Provisions
45,707 42,926 20,260 20,810 65,967 63,736
A provision is recognised if, as a result of a past event, the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation that can be estimated reliably, and it is probable
that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation.
Employee entitlements
(i) Annual leave and sick leave
Liabilities for annual leave and accumulating sick leave expected to be settled within 12 months of the reporting date are recognised in provisions in
respect of employees’ services up to the reporting date and are measured at the amounts expected to be paid when the liabilities are settled. Liabilities for
non-accumulating sick leave are recognised when the leave is taken and measured at the rates paid or payable.
(ii) Performance based compensation
The Group recognises a liability and expense for incentives payable to employees where either a contractual or constructive obligation arises to pay an employee
based on achieving an agreed level of individual and company performance.
(iii) Long service leave
The liability for long service leave is recognised in the provision for employee benefits and measured as the present value of expected future payments to be
made in respect of services provided by employees up to the reporting date. Consideration is given to expected future wage and salary levels, experience of
employee departures and periods of service. Expected future payments are discounted using market yields at the reporting date on New Zealand government
bonds with terms to maturity that match, as closely as possible, the estimated future cash outflows.
Make good provision
The Group has an obligation to restore certain leasehold sites to their original condition when the lease expires. This provision represents the present value of the
expected future make good commitment. Amounts charged to the provision represent both make good costs incurred and costs incurred which mitigate the final
liability prior to the lease expiry.
Sales return provision
The Group provides various guarantees and warranties to replace, repair or refund customers for faulty or defective products sold. This provision represents the
estimated sales return obligation at balance date based on historical sales return rates.
9.0 NON CURRENT ASSETS
9.1 Property, plant and
equipment
Land and buildingsPlant and equipmentWork in progressTotal
Note20262025202620252026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Cost
60,590 60,590 695,211 716,526 9,567 11,278 765,368 788,394
Accumulated depreciation
(13,214)(12,780)(597,076)(588,406)- - (610,290)(601,186)
Opening carrying amount
47,376 47,810 98,135 128,120 9,567 11,278 155,078 187,208
Additions
- - 15,768 10,150 3,144 (1,711)18,912 8,439
Disposals, write offs & impairment
- - (905)(244)(4,973)- (5,878)(244)
Depreciation
3.3
(403)(434)(32,423)(39,891)- - (32,826)(40,325)
Closing carrying amount
46,973 47,376 80,575 98,135 7,738 9,567 135,286 155,078
Cost
60,590 60,590 701,144 695,211 7,738 9,567 769,472 765,368
Impairment & accumulated depreciation
(13,617)(13,214)(620,569)(597,076)- - (634,186)(610,290)
Closing carrying amount
46,973 47,376 80,575 98,135 7,738 9,567 135,286 155,078
Property, plant and equipment are measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. The cost of purchased property, plant and equipment
is the value of the consideration given to acquire the assets inclusive of directly attributable costs incurred to bring the assets to the location and condition
necessary for their intended use.
Property, plant and equipment are depreciated on a straight line basis to allocate the cost, less any residual value, over their useful life. The estimated useful lives
of property, plant and equipment are as follows:
Freehold land indefinite
Freehold buildings 50 - 100 years
Plant and equipment 3 - 15 years
Work in progress not depreciated
The Group annually reviews the carrying amounts of property, plant and equipment for impairment. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to
its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount. In assessing whether an asset is impaired, reference is
made to individual store profitability and any other known events or circumstances that may indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may be impaired.
Gains and losses on disposals of assets are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These gains and losses are included in the income
statement. Costs incurred on repairs and maintenance are charged to the income statement during the financial period in which they are incurred.
Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions
The Group assesses store assets, software (refer note 9.2) and store development work in progress for indicators of impairment and, where indicators exist,
estimates their recoverable amount. This assessment requires judgement in assessing the future economic benefits expected to be derived from the assets,
including expected store performance, future utilisation and alternative deployment opportunities. Where assets are no longer expected to generate sufficient future
economic benefits, the recoverable amount is based on the most appropriate measure of value, including disposal or scrap value where applicable.
9.2 Intangible assets
GoodwillBrand namesComputer softwareTotal
Note20262025202620252026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Cost
57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 147,578 147,155 220,534 220,111
Impairment & accumulated amortisation
- - - - (80,444)(60,999)(80,444)(60,999)
Opening carrying amount
57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 67,134 86,156 140,090 159,112
Additions
- - - - 2,146 3,948 2,146 3,948
Disposals, write offs & impairment
- - - - (1,409)(104)(1,409)(104)
Amortisation
3.3
- - - - (21,222)(22,866)(21,222)(22,866)
Closing carrying amount
57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 46,649 67,134 119,605 140,090
Cost
57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 147,479 147,578 220,435 220,534
Impairment & accumulated amortisation
- - - - (100,830)(80,444)(100,830)(80,444)
Closing carrying amount
57,456 57,456 15,500 15,500 46,649 67,134 119,605 140,090
Goodwill
Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries and represents the excess of the consideration paid above the fair value of the net identifiable assets, liabilities
and contingent liabilities acquired.
Brand names
Brand names acquired in a business combination are recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Brand names are considered to have indefinite useful lives
as the Group has rights to use these names in perpetuity.
Impairment of goodwill and brand names
Assets that have an indefinite useful life are reviewed annually for impairment or whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount
of the asset may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount.
Computer software (excluding cloud computing arrangements)
Internal and external costs directly incurred in the purchase or development of software controlled by the Group are recognised as intangible assets, including
subsequent improvements, when it is probable that they will generate a future economic benefit. Computer software is amortised using the straight-line method
over periods ranging from two to ten years.
Cloud computing arrangements
Cloud computing arrangements provide the Group with the right to access a supplier’s cloud based software for a specified contract period. If the Group does not
control the cloud based software, the related development costs (external and internal) are recognised as either:
(a) an expense when they are incurred for internal costs and the costs of an integrator not related to the software provider, or
(b) as a prepayment and then expensed over the term of the cloud computing arrangement for the costs of the software provider or its subcontractor.
Brand and goodwill impairment testing
The Group performs an annual impairment test of its brand and goodwill intangible assets by comparing their recoverable amounts with their carrying amounts.
Recoverable amounts are determined using the fair value less costs of disposal methodology.
The valuations are based on discounted cash flow projections that reflect management’s assessment of future operating performance. In determining the cash
flow forecasts, the Group considers a range of factors including Board-approved budgets, strategic plans, external market evidence, historical forecast accuracy
and current trading performance. The forecasts incorporate management’s best estimate of future economic conditions and expected earnings recovery, giving
appropriate weight to external evidence where available. The Group also engages external advisers to determine appropriate discount rates and long-term growth
rates, which are key assumptions used in the valuations.
The Group’s goodwill and brand assets are allocated to cash-generating units (CGUs), which represent the lowest level within the Group at which the assets are
monitored for internal management purposes. Details of these carrying amounts allocated to each CGU, together with the key assumptions used in the impairment
tests, including the assumptions applied to extrapolate cash flows beyond the five-year forecast period, are set out below.
Impairment testing
Noel LeemingThe Warehouse
2026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Goodwill
31,776 31,776 25,680 25,680
Brand names
15,500 15,500 - -
Closing carrying amount
47,276 47,276 25,680 25,680
Key assumptions
Terminal operating margin (%)
3.4 3.2 2.3 4.0
Terminal growth rate (%)
2.1 2.0 2.1 2.0
Pre-tax discount rate (%)
16.4 15.9 15.3 15.4
Post-tax discount rate (%)
11.8 11.5 11.1 11.1
Operating margin represents earnings before interest, taxation, unusual items and the impact of NZ IFRS 16. The Warehouse segment includes the Warehouse
Stationery business and Support Office functions. The annual impairment testing of the Noel Leeming and The Warehouse CGU indicated that recoverable amounts
exceeded carrying amounts and that sufficient headroom existed within each CGU. Accordingly, the attributed goodwill and brand assets were not impaired.
Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions
The impairment assessment of goodwill and brand assets, and the recoverability assessment of carried-forward tax losses (refer note 4.3), involve estimation
uncertainty because both rely on forecasts of future financial performance. Management assesses the reasonableness of these forecasts through consideration of
historical forecasting accuracy, external market evidence and sensitivity analysis of key assumptions. Based on this assessment, management concluded that the
recoverable amounts of both the Noel Leeming and The Warehouse CGU exceeded their carrying amounts and that sufficient future taxable profits are expected to
be available to support recognition of deferred tax assets arising from carried-forward tax losses.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
4544
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
10.0 LEASE LIABILITIES AND RIGHT OF USE ASSETS
10.1 Rights of use assets
CostAccumulated depreciationCarrying amount
Note202620252026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Opening balance
1,486,277 1,454,639 (896,090)(853,029)590,187 601,610
Foreign exchange movement
425 40 (170)(18)255 22
Additions
10.2
49,922 54,621 - - 49,922 54,621
Depreciation
3.3
- - (92,848)(93,333)(92,848)(93,333)
Reassessment of lease terms
10.2
36,292 27,267 - - 36,292 27,267
Lease surrenders and terminations
(22,953)(50,290)22,696 50,290 (257)-
Closing balance
1,549,963 1,486,277 (966,412)(896,090)583,551 590,187
A ‘lease liability’ and a corresponding ‘right of use’ asset is recognised when the Group commences a lease with a term exceeding 12 months and has sufficient
value to not be characterised as a low value lease. The initial lease liability and corresponding ‘right of use’ asset represent the present value of future lease
payments discounted using the Group’s incremental borrowing rate over the lease term including any contractual lease extension options considered reasonably
certain to be exercised. The future lease payments recognise contractual fixed rate lease payment adjustments but not adjustments made for inflation-indexed
lease payment increases.
Lease payments are allocated between the lease liability and the finance cost. The finance cost is charged to the income statement over the lease period to
produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The right of use asset is depreciated over the shorter of the
asset’s useful life and the lease term on a straight line basis.
The Group leases various warehouses, retail stores, equipment and vehicles. Property leases represent around 98% of the carrying value of the Group’s ‘right of use
assets’. The property leases are negotiated on an individual basis, typically for an initial period of 6 to 10 years and usually include extension options, but may also
contain a wide variety of other terms and conditions. Extension options provide the Group with operational flexibility in terms of managing the Group’s retail intensity
within different catchment areas. The majority of extension and termination options may only be exercised by the Group and not by the landlord.
10.2 Lease liabilities
Note20262025
$ 000$ 000
Opening balance
713,839 736,812
Foreign exchange movement
248 21
Additions
10.1
49,922 54,621
Interest
36,945 36,847
Reassessment of lease terms
10.1
36,292 27,267
Lease repayments
(131,650)(141,729)
Lease surrenders and terminations
(268)-
Closing balance
10.3
705,328 713,839
10.3 Lease liability maturity analysis
Gross lease paymentsInterestCarrying amount
202620252026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Within one year
132,775 126,919 (35,290)(34,397)97,485 92,522
One to two years
115,788 122,399 (28,230)(30,155)87,558 92,244
Two to five years
335,657 319,951 (63,312)(61,235)272,345 258,716
Beyond five years
280,774 302,258 (32,834)(31,901)247,940 270,357
Lease liability
864,994 871,527 (159,666)(157,688)705,328 713,839
Current lease liability
97,485 92,522
Non current lease liability
607,843 621,317
Lease liability
10.2 705,328 713,839
Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions
To quantify lease liabilities and ‘right of use’ carrying values requires the Group to use judgement to assess the appropriate lease term and estimates to determine
the incremental borrowing rate applied to calculate these amounts. These judgements and estimates can significantly impact the carrying value of both the right of
use asset and lease liabilities recognised in the balance sheet and corresponding expenses recorded in the income statement.
The Group uses the judgement of experts within its property department to assess the lease term at the inception of a lease and to reassess a lease term when a
significant event or significant change in circumstances within the control of Group affects the prospect that a right of renewal contained in a lease will be exercised.
The Group engages an independent valuation expert to establish the incremental borrowing rates applied to new and modified leases during the year. The average
incremental borrowing rate used to calculate the value of lease liabilities at balance date was 5.44% (2025: 5.23%).
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financing and Capital Structure
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
11.0 EQUITY
11.1 Capital management
Capital is defined by the Group to be the total equity as shown in the balance sheet. The Group’s capital management objectives are to safeguard the Group’s ability
to continue as a going concern, to provide an appropriate rate of return to shareholders, optimise the Group’s cost of capital and maintain a liquidity buffer (refer
note 11.2).
The Group reviews its capital structure annually, unless there is a material change requiring an earlier response and may make adjustments by means including
changes to the Group’s dividend pay-out ratio, issue of new shares, debt issuance, sale of assets or a combination of these.
Externally imposed capital requirements
The Group has a negative pledge arrangement with its funding providers that requires the parent and its guaranteeing Group companies to comply with certain
quarterly debt ratios and restrictive covenants. The calculation of these ratios is adjusted to exclude the impact of the NZ IFRS 16 Leases accounting standard. The
principal covenants at balance date were:
1) The gearing ratio will not exceed 60% during the first quarter ending October or exceed 50% in each of the remaining quarters of the year;
2) Interest cover will not be less than 6.5 times operating profit plus depreciation, for the 2026 financial year; and
3) Interest cover will not be less than 2.0 times operating profit, for subsequent years.
Depreciation for the purposes of the cover ratio calculations (above) includes software amortisation, but excludes ‘right of use asset’ amortisation. The Group was in
compliance with all aspects of the negative pledge covenants throughout the current and previous financial year.
11.2 Bank and debt facilities
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Cash and cash equivalents
41,883 39,206
Borrowings
(58,900)(135,300)
Net debt
(17,017)(96,094)
Committed bank credit facilities
345,000 450,000
Liquidity buffer
327,983 353,906
The Group’s liquidity policy requires a minimum liquidity buffer of $100 million, with a target above $150 million.
11.3 Contributed equity
Contributed equityOrdinary shares
2026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Share capital
365,517 365,517 346,843 346,843
Treasury shares
(5,282)(5,282)(1,489)(1,489)
Contributed equity
360,235 360,235 345,354 345,354
There were no changes to the Group’s contributed equity during the current year and previous year.
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs, directly attributable to the issue of new shares, are shown in equity as a deduction from the proceeds
of the share issue.
Where the Group purchases its own equity share capital (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs is
deducted from equity attributable to the shareholders until the shares are cancelled or reissued. Where such shares are reissued, any consideration received, net
of any directly attributable incremental transaction costs, is included in equity attributable to shareholders.
Ordinary shares on issue are fully paid and carry one vote per share and participate equally in dividends, other distributions from equity and any surplus on a
winding up of the Group. The Group retains its own ordinary shares which are used for employee share based payment arrangements. Voting rights attached to the
shares are held by the trustees of the employee share plans, and dividends paid on the shares are retained by the trustee for the benefit of the Group.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Operating Assets and Liabilities
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
4746
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
11.4 Reserves
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Cash flow hedge reserve
126 (1,056)
Foreign currency translation reserve
485 220
Reserves
611 (836)
Cash flow hedge reserve
This reserve records the portion of the gain or loss on a hedging derivative in a cash flow hedge that is determined to be an effective hedge. The cumulative
deferred gain or loss on the hedge is recognised in the income statement when the hedged transaction impacts the income statement, or depending on the
nature of the hedge, is included in a non-financial hedged item when the hedged event occurs. (Refer to the consolidated statement of changes in equity and
accounting policies detailed in note 12.2).
Foreign currency translation
Exchange differences arising on translation of the Group’s subsidiaries in India and China are recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in a
separate reserve within equity. The cumulative amount is reclassified to the income statement when the net investment is sold.
11.5 Minority interest
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Opening balance
1,126 1,184
Net profit attributable to minority interest
292 337
Dividends paid to minority shareholders
(328)(395)
Closing balance
1,090 1,126
Minority interest reserve
A minority interest is an ownership position in a Group subsidiary where the minority shareholder owns less than 50% of outstanding shares and has no control
over decisions. Minority interests are measured based on the minority shareholders’ proportionate share of the net asset value of the subsidiary.
At balance date minority shareholders held a 50% (2025: 50%) shareholding in ChocolateWorks, a manufacturer of chocolate confectionery located in Waikato.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Risk Management
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
12.0 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
12.1 Financial risk factors
The Group’s activities expose it to various financial risks including liquidity risk, credit risk and market risk. The Group’s overall risk management programme focuses
on the uncertainty of financial markets and seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on the Group’s financial performance.
The Group enters into forward currency contracts to manage the currency fluctuation risks arising from the Group’s overseas purchases.
Risk management is carried out by a central treasury department (Group Treasury) under policies approved by the Board of Directors. Group Treasury identifies,
evaluates and hedges financial risks in close co-operation with the Group’s operating units. The Board provides written principles for overall risk management, as
well as written policies covering specific areas, such as mitigating foreign exchange, interest rate and credit risks, use of derivative financial instruments and investing
excess cash.
12.2 Derivative financial instruments
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Forward exchange contract assets
2,618 3,908
Forward exchange contract liabilities
(2,672)(3,768)
Derivative financial instruments
(54)140
Classified as:
Cash flow hedges
174 (1,467)
Fair value hedges
(228)1,607
Derivative financial instruments
(54)140
Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value on the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to their fair value. The method
of recognising the resulting gain or loss depends on whether the derivative is designated as a hedging instrument, and if so, the nature of the item being hedged.
For the purposes of hedge accounting, hedges are classified as:
• Cash flow hedges when they hedge an exposure to a highly probable forecast transaction; or
• Fair value hedges when they hedge the exposure to changes in fair value of a recognised asset or liability.
The Group documents at the inception of the transaction the relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management
objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge transactions. An assessment, both at hedge inception and on an ongoing basis is also documented, of whether
the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions have been and will continue to be highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of hedged
items.
Cash flow hedge
The Group applies cash flow hedge accounting to manage the currency risk associated with purchasing inventory in foreign currencies. The effective portion of
changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised in equity in the cash flow hedge reserve. The gain or loss
relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement.
Amounts accumulated in equity are recycled in the income statement in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit or loss. However, when the forecast
transaction that is hedged results in the recognition of a non-financial asset (for example, inventory), the gains and losses previously deferred in equity are
transferred from equity and included in the measurement of the initial cost or carrying amount of the asset or liability.
When a hedging instrument expires or is sold or terminated, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss
existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a
forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.
Fair value hedge
The Group applies fair value hedge accounting for hedging to manage the currency risk associated with foreign currency trade creditors. Changes in the fair
value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with any changes in the fair value of the
hedged asset or liability that are attributed to the hedged risk. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, or the hedge is not fully effective,
then the hedge or portion of the hedge which is not effective is recognised immediately in the income statement as a foreign exchange gain or loss.
Derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting
Certain derivative instruments do not qualify for hedge accounting. Changes in the fair value of any derivative instrument that does not qualify for hedge
accounting are recognised immediately in the income statement.
Material accounting judgements, estimates and assumptions
Hedge effectiveness
To assess hedge effectiveness for the Group’s currency derivatives, the Group forecasts overseas purchases for the next 18 months to confirm that the hedged
transactions remain highly probable. The testing method compares the critical terms of the hedged transactions with those of the related derivatives. The results
indicated that a high level of hedge effectiveness was expected.
Valuation
The Group’s derivatives are not traded in an active market, so quoted prices are not available to determine fair value. The Group therefore applies valuation
techniques based on observable market data. For accounting purposes under NZ IFRS 13, these valuations are classified as Level 2 fair value measurements because
they are derived from observable market inputs rather than quoted prices in an active market.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financing and Capital Structure
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
4948
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
12.3 Liquidity risk
Prudent liquidity risk management implies maintaining sufficient cash and the availability of funding through committed credit facilities to meet financial obligations
when they are due and being able to close out market positions if necessary. The Group monitors rolling forecasts of the Group’s liquidity position based on expected
cash flows to ensure a liquidity buffer is maintained in accordance with policy limits approved by the Board. The Group maintains funding flexibility by ensuring
availability using committed credit lines. The Group’s liquidity policy and committed credit facilities at balance date are detailed in note 11.1.
The table below details the Group’s derivatives and other financial liabilities (excluding lease liabilities - refer note 10.3).
Liabilities/(assets)
0 - 6 Months7 - 12 MonthsTotal
Note202620252026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
Borrowings
11.2
58,900 135,300 - - 58,900 135,300
Trade and other payables
8.3
362,362 376,758 - - 362,362 376,758
Derivatives - gross settled
(forward exchange contracts)
- outflow
12.5
218,235 230,713 109,201 89,641 327,436 320,354
- inflow
(218,335)(231,903)(110,364)(89,922)(328,699)(321,825)
Financial liabilities and derivatives
421,162 510,868 (1,163)(281)419,999 510,587
12.4 Credit risk
Credit risk arises from the financial assets of the Group which are exposed to potential counterparty default, with a maximum exposure equal to the carrying amount
of these assets. In the normal course of business the Group incurs credit risk from trade and other receivables, derivatives and transactions with financial institutions.
The Group places its cash and short-term investments and derivatives with high credit quality financial institutions approved by the Board and in accordance with
specified treasury policy limits. The Group’s treasury policy requires bank counterparties to have a minimum Standard & Poor’s credit rating of at least A (2025: A).
The Group controls its credit risk from trade and other receivables by the application of credit approval, limits and monitoring procedures. Receivable balances are
monitored on an ongoing basis to ensure the Group’s bad debt exposure is not significant. Concentrations of credit risk exist when changes in economic, industry or
geographical factors similarly affect the group of counterparties whose aggregate credit exposure is significant in relation to the Group’s total credit exposure. As the
Group transacts with a diversity of counterparties it does not have any significant exposure to any individual customers, industry or economic sector.
12.5 Market risk
Foreign exchange risk
The Group purchases inventory directly from overseas suppliers, primarily priced in US dollars. To protect against exchange rate movements and manage the
inventory costing process, the Group enters into forward exchange contracts to purchase foreign currencies. These contracts hedge highly probable forecast
purchases and are timed to mature when the payments are scheduled to be settled. Management work to a Board approved Treasury Policy to manage this foreign
exchange risk. The policy parameters for hedging forecast currency exposures are:
• to hedge 80% to 100% of US dollar commitments expected in the next 0 to 4 months
• to hedge 50% to 90% of US dollar commitments expected in the next 5 to 12 months
• where exposures to other currencies arise, the Group hedges these risks once a firm commitment is in place
• specific approval is required to hedge foreign currency commitments extending beyond a 12-month time horizon.
Carrying valueNotional amount (NZD)Average exchange rate0 to 12 month hedge level
Currency position at balance date
20262025202620252026202520262025
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000CentsCentsPercentagePercentage
Forward exchange contracts
Buy US dollars/Sell New Zealand dollars
(54)140 327,436 320,354 0.59120.5921 66.9 63.2
The spot rate used to determine the mark-to-market carrying value of the US dollar forward contracts at balance date was $0.5890 (2025: $0.5894).
The following sensitivity table, based on currency contracts and foreign currency trade creditors in existence at balance date, shows the positive/(negative) impact of
reasonably possible exchange rate movements on after tax profit and equity, with all other variables held constant.
+ 10 percent- 10 percent
Foreign currency sensitivity table
NoteAmountProfitEquityProfitEquity
$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000$ 000
At 2 August 2026
Foreign currency trade creditors
8.3
(71,588)4,686 4,686 (5,727)(5,727)
Derivative financial instruments
Forward exchange contracts - cash flow hedges
12.2
174 - (16,504)- 20,171
Currency forward contracts - fair value hedges
12.2
(228)(4,658)(4,658)5,693 5,693
Total increase/(decrease)
28 (16,476)(34)20,137
At 3 August 2025
Foreign currency trade creditors
8.3
(75,223)4,924 4,924 (6,018)(6,018)
Derivative financial instruments
Forward exchange contracts - cash flow hedges
12.2
(1,467)- (15,852)- 19,375
Forward exchange contracts - fair value hedges
12.2
1,607 (4,890)(4,890)5,977 5,977
Total increase/(decrease)
34 (15,818)(41)19,334
Notes to the Financial Statements - Other Disclosures
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
13.0 KEY MANAGEMENT
Key management includes the Directors of the Company and the members of the Group’s Leadership Team during the year, comprising the Group Chief Executive
Officer and his 11 (2025: 6) direct reports at balance date. Compensation paid to Directors and other members of key management of the Group is set out in the two
tables below:
Directors’ fees
20262025
$ 000$ 000
J W M Journee (appointed as interim Group CEO from May 2024 to July 2025, appointed Chair November 2025)
165 -
A J Balfour (retired November 2024)
- 39
A J Carter
117 118
D R Hamilton
114 114
C M Rainsford
94 94
H J Rumbold (appointed November 2025)
63 -
R E Taulelei
115 117
R J Tindall (resigned November 2025)
38 107
J Withers (Chair until retired in November 2025)
61 183
Total
767 772
During the 2026 financial year, J W M Journee received $148,000 for advisory services provided to the Group in addition to his director services. His role as interim
Group CEO ended in July 2025, and remuneration of $1,747,936 for the 2025 financial year, in his capacity as Group CEO and Executive Director, is included in the key
management remuneration table below.
Key management
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Base salary
6,877 5,691
Retention (cash settled)
240 120
Annual performance based compensation
2,508 375
Three year performance based compensation (cash settled)
533 437
Termination benefits
357 564
Total
10,515 7,187
14.0 COMMITMENTS
Capital expenditure contracted for at balance date, but not recognised as liabilities, is set out below
Capital commitments
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Within one year
1,261 1,957
15.0 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES
20262025
$ 000$ 000
Standby letter of credit
17,500 17,500
Bank guarantees provided to landlords and the New Zealand Exchange Limited
315 315
Contingent liabilities
17,815 17,815
16.0 RELATED PARTIES
During the period, the Group has not entered into any material contracts involving related parties or Directors’ interests which are not disclosed. No amounts owed
by related parties have been written off or forgiven during the period.
Notes to the Financial Statements - Financial Risk Management
For the 52 week period ended 2 August 2026
5150
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
PricewaterhouseCoopers, PwC Tower, 15 Customs Street West,
Private Bag 92162, Auckland 1142, New Zealand
+64 9 355 8000
pwc.co.nz
Independent auditor’s report
To the shareholders of The Warehouse Group Limited
Our opinion
In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated financial statements (the financial statements) of The Warehouse
Group Limited (the Company), including its subsidiaries (the Group), present fairly, in all material respects, the
financial position of the Group as at 2 August 2026, its financial performance, and its cash flows for the 52 week
period then ended in accordance with New Zealand Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards (NZ
IFRS) and International Financial Reporting Standards Accounting Standards (IFRS Accounting Standards).
What we have audited
The Group's financial statements comprise:
• the consolidated balance sheet as at 2 August 2026;
• the consolidated income statement for the 52 week period then ended;
• the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the 52 week period then ended;
• the consolidated statement of changes in equity for the 52 week period then ended;
• the consolidated statement of cash flows for the 52 week period then ended; and
• the notes to the financial statements, comprising material accounting policy information and other explanatory
information.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (New Zealand) (ISAs (NZ)) and
International Standards on Auditing (ISAs). Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report.
We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
Independence
We are independent of the Group in accordance with Professional and Ethical Standard 1 International Code of
Ethics for Assurance Practitioners (including International Independence Standards) (New Zealand) issued by
the New Zealand Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (PES 1) and the International Code of Ethics for
Professional Accountants (including International Independence Standards) issued by the International Ethics
Standards Board for Accountants (IESBA Code), as applicable to audits of financial statements of public interest
entities. We have also fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with PES 1 and the IESBA Code.
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provi des revi ew and agreed-upon procedures servi ces. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our fi rm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordi nary course of tradi ng
activi ties of the business. The fi rm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit mat ters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our profe ssional judgement, were of most signifi cance in our audit of
the fi nancial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
fi nancial statements as a whole, and in fo rming our opinion thereon, and we do not provi de a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at
2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test included the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
5352
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
3 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
The Warehouse’s impairment assessment is
considered a key audit matter due to the significance
of the carrying value of the goodwill and other assets
allocated to the CGU as well as significant judgement
involved in estimating future business performance,
particularly the timing and extent of the forecast
earnings recovery. This judgement is heightened by
the uncertainty associated with achieving forecast
improvement in operating margins.
Key assumptions included in the impairment
assessment are:
• forecast future cash flows, which include
estimates and assumptions around operating
margin in the terminal year;
• discount rate; and
• terminal growth rate.
The CGU’s recoverable amount reflects the
uncertainty surrounding the timing and extent of the
expected earnings recovery. Based on the
assumptions above, management concluded that
sufficient headroom exists within each CGU and no
impairment of goodwill has been recognised.
Refer to note 9.2 of the financial statements for
further information.
• agreeing forecast future performance included in the FVLCOD
impairment assessment to the model approved by the Board;
• assessing and challenging the reasonableness of the forecast
cash flows, including management’s estimates and assumptions
around the terminal operating margin, with reference to historical
performance and external market evidence;
• assessing, with the assistance of our auditor's expert, the
reasonableness of the discount rate and terminal growth rate
used within the impairment assessment;
• evaluating management’s sensitivity analysis to ascertain the
impact of reasonably possible changes in key assumptions;
• performing our own sensitivity analysis and stress testing the
cash flow forecasts to determine whether reasonably possible
adverse changes in the key assumptions would result in a
material impairment; and
• assessing the disclosures in note 9.2 relating to the impairment
methodology and key assumptions used in The Warehouse CGU
impairment assessment.
Our audit approach
Overview
Overall group materiality: $11,500,000, which represents approximately 0.38% of total revenues.
We chose total revenues as the benchmark because, in our view, it is a key financial statement metric
used in assessing the performance of the Group and it is a generally accepted benchmark.
Full scope audits were performed for the Group’s two trading entities based on their financial
significance.
Specified audit procedures were performed over certain remaining entities.
As reported above, we have two key audit matters, being:
• Inventory valuation
• Goodwill impairment assessment – The Warehouse
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the
financial statements. In particular, we considered where management made subjective judgements; for example, in
respect of significant accounting estimates that involved making assumptions and considering future events that are
inherently uncertain. As in all of our audits, we also addressed the risk of management override of internal controls,
including among other matters, consideration of whether there was evidence of bias that represented a risk of
material misstatement due to fraud.
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
4 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. An audit is designed to obtain reasonable
assurance about whether the financial statements are free from material misstatement. Misstatements may arise
due to fraud or error. They are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be
expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial statements.
Based on our professional judgement, we determined certain quantitative thresholds for materiality, including the
overall group materiality for the financial statements as a whole as set out above. These, together with qualitative
considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit, the nature, timing and extent of our audit
procedures, and to evaluate the effect of misstatements, both individually and in the aggregate, on the financial
statements as a whole.
How we tailored our group audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit in order to perform sufficient work to enable us to provide an opinion on the
financial statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the Group, the accounting processes and
controls, and the industry in which the Group operates.
Other information
The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included
in the Annual Report (which includes the Sustainability Report by way of cross-reference), but does not include the
financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon.
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and we do not express any form of
audit opinion or assurance conclusion thereon.
In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in
doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our
knowledge obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If, based on the work we have
performed on the other information that we obtained prior to the date of this auditor’s report, we conclude that
there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to
report in this regard.
Responsibilities of the Directors for the financial statements
The Directors are responsible, on behalf of the Company, for the preparation and fair presentation of the financial
statements in accordance with NZ IFRS and IFRS Accounting Standards, and for such internal control as the
Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s ability to continue as a
going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern, and using the going concern basis of
accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or to cease operations, or have no realistic
alternative but to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements, as a whole, are free from
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion.
Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with
ISAs (NZ) and ISAs will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud
or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to
influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
5554
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
5 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located at the External
Reporting Board’s website at:
https://www.xrb.govt.nz/standards/assurance-standards/auditors-responsibilities/audit-report-1-1/
This description forms part of our auditor’s report.
Who we report to
This report is made solely to the Company’s shareholders, as a body. Our audit work has been undertaken so that
we might state those matters which we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose.
To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company
and the Company’s shareholders, as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.
The engagement partner on the audit resulting in this independent auditor’s report is Philippa (Pip) Cameron.
For and on behalf of:
PricewaterhouseCoopers Auckland
29 September 2026
2 PwC - Independent auditor’s report
In our capacity as auditor, our firm also provides review and agreed-upon procedures services. In addition, certain
partners and employees of our firm may deal with the Group on normal terms within the ordinary course of trading
activities of the business. The firm has no other relationship with, or interests in, the Group.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of
the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on
these matters.
Description of the key audit matter How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Inventory valuation
The carrying value of the Group's inventory as at 2
August 2026 was $438.8 million with inventory
provisions of $18.9 million.
To value inventory, the Group measures inventory at
the lower of cost and net realisable value by
deducting provisions from the cost of inventory which
are determined based on various factors including
historical data, current selling trends, and product
information from buyers within the business.
Determining the appropriate level of provisions
involves judgement, including management's
expectations of future sales levels and future selling
prices. Due to the judgements involved in estimating
the inventory provisions, and the significance of the
inventory balance, this is an area of focus for the
audit and a key audit matter. The assessment was
particularly relevant in FY26 given the reduction in
total inventory, while inventory provisions increased.
Note 8.1 of the financial statements describes the
accounting policy for inventory and the judgements
and estimates applied by management to determine
the inventory provisions.
We have updated our understanding of the key processes and controls
surrounding inventory provisioning and assessed the design and
implementation of relevant controls, in particular controls over the
cyclical count process.
Our procedures to audit the inventory provisions included the following:
• observing and inspecting management's stocktake procedures
throughout the period, at a sample of selected locations, to
confirm that aged and clearance items were identified and
accounted for;
• performing risk assessment analytics at an inventory category
level by assessing how the provisions as a percentage of total
stock on hand for this period compare to the prior period, and
understanding the rationale for material or unexpected changes;
• holding discussions with management to understand the
assumptions used to estimate inventory provisions;
• assessing management’s ability to forecast accurately by
comparing inventory provisions in the prior period against actual
inventory write-offs and sales below cost in the current period;
• on a sample basis, testing that finished goods were valued at the
lower of cost or net realisable value by comparing the recorded
cost with recent or expected selling prices, less the costs
necessary to make the sale;
• on a sample basis, testing inventory ageing schedules and
checking whether provisions were recorded for aged stock in
accordance with the Group policy; and
• performing a reasonableness test of the shrinkage provisions by
comparing the provision against the actual shrinkage for the 52
week period.
Goodwill impairment assessment – The
Warehouse
Goodwill, an indefinite life intangible asset, allocated
to the Group’s The Warehouse cash generating unit
(CGU) as at 2 August 2026, amounted to $25.7
million.
Our audit focused on this CGU as it remained the
area of greatest impairment judgement within the
Group. While FY26 performance showed some
improvement, the Warehouse segment continued to
be adversely impacted by challenging trading
conditions, as reflected in the CGU’s operating
performance disclosed in note 2 of the financial
statements.
Management performed an annual impairment
assessment to determine the recoverable amount
using a discounted cash flow model under a fair value
less costs of disposal (FVLCOD) basis.
Our procedures to audit The Warehouse CGU’s management
impairment test include the following:
• understanding the processes undertaken by management in
performing the impairment test;
• evaluating the design of controls relevant to management’s
process to assess impairment, considering if they are designed
effectively, and confirming that they have been implemented;
• considering the appropriateness of management’s CGU
assessment;
• testing the basis of allocation of the Group’s assets, liabilities and
cost of doing business to the CGU;
• reviewing prior year actual sales and profitability against the
original budgeted performance to assess management’s ability to
accurately forecast;
• gaining an understanding of the forecast outlook for the industry,
the strategic direction of the business and ongoing earnings
recovery expectations;
5756
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Financial Statements
5958
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Governance
Report
At The Warehouse Group, we are committed to the highest standards of corporate governance
and ethical conduct.
We believe that these values help to create sustainable long-term value for our shareholders,
build a strong team, improve the experience we offer our customers and contribute to our
place within the wider community.
This corporate governance statement provides an overview of the policies and processes that
are in place at The Warehouse Group Limited (the Company) which ensure that the highest
standards of corporate governance are maintained. The Company notes and supports the
updated NZX Corporate Governance Code dated 31 March 2026 (NZX Code).
This statement follows the structure of the NZX Code and addresses its recommendations.
The Company’s Constitution, the Board and committee charters, codes and policies referred
to in this statement are available at www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/about-us/corporate-
governance.
6160
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Our Board
Our
Board
John Journee
BCom, CFinstD, MAICD
Chair and Non-Executive Director
John was Interim CEO and Executive
Director of the Company from May 2024
to July 2025, during which time he was
considered to be non-independent. From
August 2025, John returned to the Board
as a non-independent, non-executive
Director. He has been appointed Chair
effective from the close of the 2025
Annual Shareholders’ Meeting. John has
had an extensive retail career, including
executive experience across sectors
that span general merchandise, fashion
apparel, FMCG, consumer electronics,
telecommunications, hospitality and
electricity retailing. His career has
included 15 years with The Warehouse
Group, starting as a joint-venture
partner in 1990 and progressing through
senior roles in operations, marketing,
merchandise, international sourcing
and business development. John has
also held CEO roles with Noel Leeming
and foodservice distributor Southern
Hospitality.
Committees:
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
• Disclosure Committee
• People and Remuneration
Committee
• Audit and Risk Committee
• Corporate Governance and
Nominations Committee
• Environmental and Social
Sustainability Committee (until
dissolution of the Committee
effective 1 December 2025)
Other Directorships:
• Farmlands Society
• Colonial Motor Company Limited
• Data Insights Group Advisory Board
Dean Hamilton
BCA
Independent Non-Executive Director
Dean has significant CEO and financial
markets experience. Most recently
he was CEO of Silver Fern Farms
Limited, where he led the business
successfully through a period of
significant change and improvement
in financial performance, staff and
supplier engagement, sustainability,
and consumer trust in brand. Dean’s
prior experience includes 12 years at
global investment bank Deutsche
Bank, working in both Australia and
New Zealand, where he advised a wide
range of companies on mergers and
acquisitions, capital management,
corporate restructuring and capital
raising.
Committees:
• Audit and Risk Committee (Chair)
• Disclosure Committee (Chair)
• Corporate Governance and
Nominations Committee (Chair)
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
Other Directorships:
• Fulton Hogan Limited (Chair)
• Auckland International Airport
Limited
• Tappenden Holdings Limited
• Ryman Healthcare Limited (Chair)
Antony (Tony) Carter
CNZM, BE (Hons), ME, MPhil
Independent Non-Executive Director
Tony has a broad range of experience
in governance across the consumer,
industrial services, infrastructure and
energy sectors. Tony currently chairs the
boards of My Food Bag Group Limited,
Skin Institute Holding Company Limited,
Datacom Group Limited, TR Group
Limited and The Interiors Group Holdco
Limited and is a director of Ravensdown
Limited and Sanford Limited. His
previous directorships include roles
at Fisher & Paykel Healthcare, Air New
Zealand Limited, Fletcher Building
Limited, ANZ Bank New Zealand
Limited and Vector Limited. He has
previously served as managing director
of supermarket operator Foodstuffs
Auckland and Foodstuffs New Zealand.
In 2020 he was made a Companion
of the New Zealand Order of Merit for
Services to Business Governance.
Committees:
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee (Chair)
• Audit and Risk Committee
Other Directorships:
• My Food Bag Group Limited (Chair)
• Skin Institute Holding Company
Limited (Chair)
• Datacom Group Limited (Chair)
• TR Group Limited (Chair)
• The Interiors Group Holdco Limited
(Chair)
• Ravensdown Limited
• Sanford Limited
Rachel Taulelei
CNZM, LLB
Ngāti Raukawa ki te Tonga, Ngāti Rārua
Independent Non-Executive Director
Rachel is a prominent business
leader and a strong advocate for the
Māori economy and values-based
business models. Her commitment
to kaitiakitanga has been evident
throughout her career, as founder of
sustainable seafood company Yellow
Brick Road in 2006, to her time as CEO
of Māori-owned food and beverage
company Kono, and now in her current
role as co-founder of business design
and brand strategy firm Oho. Rachel
has held a number of governance
roles and presently serves as a director
on the board of Mercury NZ Limited,
ANZCO Foods Limited, and Wellington
International Airport Limited. She is
Chair of NZ Rugby’s Appointments
and Remuneration Panel, co-owner of
professional women’s basketball team
the Tokomanawa Queens, and acts as
an advisor to the Centre for Strategic
Philanthropy, venture capital firm Movac,
and Huia Publishing.
Committees:
• People and Remuneration
Committee (Chair)
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
• Corporate Governance and
Nominations Committee
• Environmental and Social
Sustainability Committee (until
dissolution of the Committee
effective 1 December 2025)
Other Directorships:
• ANZCO Foods Limited
• Wellington International Airport
Limited
• Mercury NZ Limited
Hamish Rumbold
BCom/BProp
Independent Non-Executive Director
Hamish is a Non-Executive Director
with multi-sector expertise across
key governance domains: customer
experience, digital and data
strategy, technology transformation,
cybersecurity, and risk and compliance.
He is a governance professional and
a graduate of the Australian Institute
of Company Directors (AICD). Hamish
currently serves as a Non-Executive
Director for House of Travel Holdings,
Ryman Healthcare, and Livestock
Improvement Corporation (LIC). He
is also the Non-Executive Director
and Chair of Perigee HoldCo Limited,
a majority private equity-owned
FX remittance business trading as
OrbitRemit. Hamish previously held
general management and executive
roles with Air New Zealand and
Kiwibank.
Committees:
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
• People and Remuneration
Committee
Other Directorships:
• Livestock Improvement Corporation
Limited (LIC)
• Ryman Healthcare Limited
• House of Travel Holdings Limited
• Perigee HoldCo Limited
Caroline Rainsford
BCom (Hons)
Independent Non-Executive Director
Caroline is the Country Director for
Google NZ, where she is responsible for
driving the overall revenue and business
strategy for New Zealand. Partnering
with government, policy teams and
New Zealand business leaders, she
is focused on helping New Zealand
businesses grow and transform in the
digital age. Prior to joining Google in
2017, Caroline was the Marketing and
Product Director for the Latitude NZ
(previously GE Capital) business as well
as the Brand Director for the Australian
and New Zealand regions. Her earlier
career included roles with Philips Royal
Electronics in the Middle East, Turkey
and Africa. Caroline holds a Bachelor of
Commerce (Hons) from the University of
Auckland.
Committees:
• Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
• People and Remuneration
Committee
Other Directorships:
• Otereti Limited
• Tech NZ (Board Member)
6362
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Executive Leadership Team
Silv Roest
Group Chief Legal, Corporate Affairs and
Sustainability Officer
Silv joined the business in 2024
as General Counsel and Company
Secretary and was appointed Group
Chief Legal, Corporate Affairs and
Sustainability Officer in August
2025, while continuing in her role as
Company Secretary.
Before joining the business, Silv held
senior legal and governance roles at
Spark New Zealand and began her
legal career at Russell McVeagh. Silv
holds degrees in Law and Commerce
from the University of Otago.
Executive
Leadership Team
Mark Stirton
Group Chief Executive Officer
Mark joined the business as Chief
Financial Officer in 2024 and was
appointed Group Chief Executive
Officer in August 2025.
Mark spent a decade with South
African retailer Mr Price Group, where
he held several senior leadership
roles, including Group Chief Financial
Officer. Before that, he held leadership
roles at Aspen Pharmacare and
Eurotap Investments and began his
career with PwC. Mark is a Chartered
Accountant, Fellow Certified
Management Accountant and holds
an MBA in Global Digital Business and
Transformation from the University of
Barcelona.
Stefan Knight
Group Chief Financial Officer
Stefan joined the business in August
2025 after more than twenty years
with Spark New Zealand, where he
most recently served as Financial
Director. He began his career in audit
and corporate finance with Deloitte.
A Chartered Accountant, Stefan holds
a Bachelor of Commerce in Accounting
and Finance from the University of
Auckland and has completed the
CFO Leadership Program at Harvard
Business School.
Richard Parker
Group Chief People Officer
Richard joined the business in 2019 as
General Manager, People Experience,
Remuneration and Employee
Relations and was appointed Group
Chief People Officer in 2020.
He began his career as a litigation
lawyer with Chapman Tripp before
moving to Fletcher Challenge as
corporate legal counsel. He later held
senior people leadership roles at Spark
New Zealand and TVNZ. Richard holds
an LLB (Hons) and MPhil (Hons) from
the University of Auckland.
Shayne Tong
Group Chief Digital and Transformation
Officer
Shayne Tong joined The Warehouse
Group in August 2025 as Group Chief
Digital and Transformation Officer,
leading the Group’s enterprise
technology, digital and business
transformation agenda. He brings
more than 20 years’ experience leading
large-scale transformation, including
senior executive roles with Foodstuffs
South Island, Auckland District Health
Board, Genesis Energy and Fletcher
Building. Shayne is a Chartered
Accountant and holds a Bachelor of
Business degree in Accounting from
Auckland University of Technology.
Lyle Brady
Group Chief Supply Chain Officer
Lyle joined the business in 2023 as
General Manager Supply Chain and
was appointed Group Chief Supply
Chain Officer in November 2025.
Before moving to New Zealand, he
held senior supply chain leadership
roles with Massmart (Walmart Africa).
Lyle began his career in audit with
Deloitte and McGladrey and holds a
BCompt Honours degree in Auditing
and Tax. He is also a Member of the
Chartered Institute of Procurement &
Supply.
Ian Carter
Chief Operations Officer – The Warehouse /
Warehouse Stationery
Ian joined The Warehouse Group
in 2019 and was appointed Chief
Operations Officer in 2021, leading
store operations, experience and
development, Warehouse Stationery,
and property.
Ian brings over 25 years of international
retail leadership experience delivering
operational transformation and
improving customer experience at
scale. Prior to joining The Warehouse
Group, he held senior leadership roles
with McKesson UK, Halfords and B&Q.
Ankit Gupta
Group Chief Data and AI Officer
Ankit was appointed Group Chief Data
and AI Officer in January 2026.
He joined the business in 2022 and
has held several senior technology
leadership roles, most recently leading
Group Technology. Prior to joining The
Warehouse Group, he held technology
leadership positions at Spark New
Zealand and One NZ. Ankit holds
a Bachelor’s degree in Computer
Science from SRM Institute of Science
and Technology and an MBA in Digital
Transformation, AI and Blockchain
from the University of Barcelona.
Jason Bell
Chief Executive Officer - Noel Leeming
Jason Bell has more than 30 years’
experience with Noel Leeming and
serves as Chief Executive Officer. Since
joining the business as an Appliance
Buyer, he has held a range of senior
leadership roles across merchandise
and operations, including Executive
General Manager Merchandise and
Chief Operating Officer. Jason holds
a Postgraduate Diploma in Business
Administration from the University of
Auckland.
Carrie Fairley
Chief Merchandise Officer – The Warehouse
/ Warehouse Stationery
Carrie joined the business in 2011 and
was appointed Chief Merchandise
Officer in August 2025.
She has held a range of senior
merchandise and planning leadership
roles and brings extensive retail
experience from New Zealand and
South Africa, including roles with
Number One Shoes, Truworths
and Edcon. Carrie holds a Bachelor
of Science (Honours) in Business
Management from Birmingham City
University.
Frankie Coulter
Chief Marketing Officer – The Warehouse /
Warehouse Stationery
Frankie joined the business in January
2026 as Chief Marketing Officer.
He brings more than 25 years of
marketing and brand leadership
experience across New Zealand and
international markets. Before joining
The Warehouse Group, he held senior
marketing leadership roles with a
range of well-known consumer brands,
including Goodman Fielder, Wattie’s,
Kellogg’s, Boots and Durex. Frankie
was named New Zealand Marketer of
the Year in 2024 and became a fellow
of the Global Marketing Academy in
March 2025.
Deric Fairley
Acting Chief Planning Officer – The
Warehouse / Warehouse Stationery
Deric was appointed Acting Chief
Planning Officer in December 2025.
He brings more than 25 years of
merchandise planning and retail
experience across New Zealand
and South Africa, including senior
leadership roles with The Warehouse
Group, EziBuy, Billabong, Edcon and
Truworths. Deric holds a Bachelor of
Technology in Retail and Business
Management from Cape Peninsula
University of Technology.
6564
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Corporate Governance
This governance statement was approved by the Board on 29
September 2026 and is current as at that date.
As at the date of the publication of this Annual Report, the
Company considers its governance practices are compliant
with the NZX Code, but for Recommendation 2.9 to have an
independent chair of the board (further explanation can be found
on page 65).
Principle 1 – Ethical Standards
“Directors should set high standards of ethical behaviour, model
this behaviour and hold management accountable for these
standards being followed throughout the organisation.”
The Company is committed to fostering the highest standards
of ethical behaviour and good conduct. We believe this is at the
heart of having a reputation as a trusted and respected company
that promotes honesty, integrity and ethical conduct across the
organisation in decision-making and day-to-day behaviour.
Code of Ethics
The Company’s Code of Ethics sets out the standards of conduct
expected of everyone working at The Warehouse Group, including
Directors, team members, contractors and any other person
engaged by the Company. The Code of Ethics sets out the
principles that guide decision-making and sets expectations of
the conduct that is consistent with the Company’s values and
behaviours, business goals and legal obligations. An introduction
to the Code of Ethics forms part of the induction and training
process of new employees.
The Company has an external hotline and web address (managed
by an independent third party), which any employee can
contact confidentially if they wish to report any misconduct or
other concerning behaviour at The Warehouse Group, including
breaches of the Code of Ethics.
The Code of Ethics also outlines the potential consequences of,
and internal reporting procedures for, any breaches. Sanctions
for breaches may include serious disciplinary action, removal
from office and dismissal, to the extent permitted by law and as
appropriate given the specific circumstances.
The Code of Ethics is available in the Corporate Governance
section of the Company’s website.
Financial Products Trading Policy
The Company is committed to transparency and fairness in
dealing with all its stakeholders and to ensuring adherence to all
applicable laws and regulations. The Financial Products Trading
Policy governs trading in the Company’s securities by Directors,
team members and other associated persons. The policy and
timing of black-out periods is set out in the Financial Products
Trading Policy, which is available in the Corporate Governance
section of our website.
Principle 2 – Board Composition and
Performance
“To ensure an effective Board, there should be a balance of
independence, skills, knowledge, experience and perspectives.”
Responsibilities of the Board
The central role of the Board is to set the strategic direction
of the Company, to select and appoint the Company’s Group
Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and to oversee the Company’s
management and business activities, with the primary objective
to create and continue to build sustainable value for shareholders.
This requires consideration of, and regular engagement with,
all stakeholders that are critical to our success, including
shareholders, employees, customers, suppliers and communities,
as determined by the Company and the Board.
The Board Charter, which is available in the Corporate Governance
section of the Company’s website, sets out how the Board will
achieve its purpose. The Charter is reviewed at least every two
years and it was last reviewed in September 2026. The Board’s
responsibilities, as described in the Charter, are set out in the
adjacent table.
Management and administration of the Company is undertaken
by the Group CEO, who is assisted by the executive leadership
team, in accordance with the strategy, plans and delegations
approved by the Board. The Board has implemented appropriate
procedures to enable Management to undertake its delegated
duties and for performance to be assessed.
Board Responsibilities
Strategy
and
Planning
• Set strategic direction and appropriate operating
frameworks
• Monitor Management’s performance within those
frameworks
People
Resources
• Ensure that the Board is, and remains
appropriately skilled, to meet the changing needs
of the Company
• Ensure there are adequate resources available to
meet the Company’s objectives
• Appoint and remove the Group CEO and oversee
succession plans for the executive leadership
team
• Set criteria for, and evaluate the performance of,
the Group CEO and approve their remuneration
• Regularly review, approve and adopt the Diversity
and Inclusion Policy and diversity objectives,
and annually measure achievement against the
objectives
Financial
Performance
and Risk
• Approve and monitor financial reporting and
capital management including the payment of
dividends
• Approve the Company’s operating budgets and
any major capital expenditures by the Company
• Monitor the financial solvency of the Company
• Approve the appointment and retention of the
external auditor, and, subject to shareholder
approval being granted, fix the fees and expenses
• Ensure that effective risk management
procedures are in place and are being used
Health and
Safety
• Ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, a safe
and healthy working environment is provided
and maintained for all employees, customers,
contractors and visitors
Ethical
Behaviour
and
Corporate
Governance
• Promote and authorise ethical and responsible
decision-making by the Company
• Ensure the Company has appropriate corporate
governance structures in place including
standards of ethical behaviour
• Approve timely and balanced communication to
shareholders
• Oversee and approve the Company’s
environmental and social sustainability strategy,
ensuring it is aspirational, aligned with the
Company’s purpose and long-term value creation,
supported by appropriate policies, resourcing and
organisational design, complies with applicable
legal and regulatory requirements, and is
monitored against clear objectives, metrics and
targets
The Board
The Board comprises six Directors: John Journee (Chair), Tony
Carter, Dean Hamilton, Caroline Rainsford, Rachel Taulelei, and
Hamish Rumbold. Director profiles are available on pages 60 and
61.
Chair
John Journee is the Chair of The Warehouse Group Board. He was
first appointed in 2025 and is a non-independent, non-executive
Director.
The Chair’s responsibilities include:
• Providing leadership to the Board and to the Company
• Ensuring the efficient organisation and conduct of the Board
• Monitoring Board performance annually
• Facilitating Board discussions to ensure core issues facing the
Company are addressed
• Briefing all Directors in relation to issues arising at Board meetings
• Facilitating the effective contribution and ongoing development
of all Directors
• Promoting consultative and respectful relations between Board
members and between the Board and Management
• Chairing Board and shareholder meetings
The Warehouse Group Board Charter states that the Board Chair
must not also be the Company’s Chief Executive Officer.
Director Appointments
Procedures for the appointment and removal of Directors are
governed by the Company’s Constitution and the NZX Listing
Rules. The Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee is
delegated responsibility for identifying and nominating, for the
approval of the Board, candidates to fill Board vacancies as and
when they arise.
In doing so the Committee will seek to identify the necessary and
desirable competencies which will ensure that any candidate it
puts forward will enable the Board to:
• Fulfil its responsibilities
• Represent a variety of skills, expertise and experience (including
commercial and/or industry experience and diversity of background
and thought)
• Competently address accounting, finance and legal matters
The terms and conditions of appointment are set out in a
letter of appointment that details the Director’s duties, term of
appointment (subject to shareholder approval), expectations
of the role and remuneration. A copy of the standard letter is
available in the Corporate Governance section of the Company’s
website.
The Company indemnifies and provides insurance to Directors in
accordance with the Companies Act 1993, for certain claims that
may be brought against them as Directors.
Director Induction and Development
When appointed to the Board, all new Directors undergo a
detailed induction programme to familiarise them with the
Company’s businesses and strategy. Ongoing training includes
briefings by senior management and guest speakers on relevant
industry and competitive issues and site visits.
Director Independence and Conflicts
The factors that the Board considers when determining the
independence of a Director, including the requirements of the
NZX Corporate Governance Code, are set out in full in the Board
Charter. The Board assesses the independence of each Director on
their appointment and at least annually thereafter.
Of the Board’s six Directors, Tony Carter, Dean Hamilton, Caroline
Rainsford, Rachel Taulelei and Hamish Rumbold have been
determined to be independent non-executive Directors. In
making this determination, consideration was given to whether
any Director had a disqualifying relationship (as defined in the
NZX Listing Rules), the factors detailed in the NZX Corporate
Governance Code, and any other matters that might be relevant
to Directors’ independence.
Consideration was given to Caroline Rainsford’s role as Country
Director of Google, a provider of material professional services
to the Company, in the context of one of the factors in the NZX
Corporate Governance Code. The Board has formed the view that,
given that:
• advertising and marketing spend and activity is typically a
management decision rather than a matter which comes to the
Board for consideration; and
• Caroline Rainsford does not have any direct involvement with
the Company’s business with Google; and
• any conflicts that may arise from time to time can be effectively
managed;
Caroline Rainsford’s role will not interfere with her capacity to
bring an independent judgement to bear on issues before the
Board, and to act in the best interests of the Company and its
shareholders.
John Journee was Interim Group CEO from 20 May 2024 to
31 July 2025 during which time he was considered to be not
independent. On 1 August 2025, John Journee ceased to be
Interim Group CEO and remains not independent due to his
recent responsibilities as Interim Group CEO and tenure on the
Board.
John Journee was appointed Chair effective from the end of the
2025 Annual Shareholders’ Meeting following Dame Joan Withers’
resignation from the Board, and is a non-independent director.
Recommendation 2.9 of the NZX Corporate Governance Code
recommends that the Chair be independent. The commentary
to the recommendation notes that an independent Chair can
contribute to a culture of openness and constructive challenge
that allows a diversity of views to be considered by the Board, and
can promote constructive and respectful relations between the
Board and management. While John Journee is not considered an
independent Chair under the NZX Corporate Governance Code,
the Board believes his governance and leadership experience,
together with his recent service as Interim Group CEO, provide
important continuity of leadership as the Group continues its
turnaround. The Board considers Mr Journee’s extensive retail
experience, knowledge of the Group and diverse perspectives
from his other governance roles, positions him well to stimulate
balanced Board discussion.
The Board is conscious of its obligation to ensure that Directors
avoid conflicts of interest between their duty to the Company
and their own interests. Where potential conflicts of interest arise
then the Director must disclose their interest. Directors and team
members are required to minimise any potential conflicts, in
accordance with the Company’s Code of Ethics.
Board Structure, Skills and Composition
The Board comprises Directors with a mix of qualifications, skills
and experience appropriate to the Company’s existing operations
and strategic direction. A comprehensive matrix of Director
skills is set out on page 66, and qualifications and experience of
individual Directors are detailed on pages 60 and 61.
6766
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Relevant Board Skills to Execute Group Strategy
John
Journee
Dean
Hamilton
Rachel
Taulelei
Caroline
Rainsford
Tony
Carter
Hamish
Rumbold
Industry Specific
Operational experience in the retail industry
Brand, marketing and customer experience
Integrated retail experience
Digital and technology experience
Direct sourcing experience
Logistics experience
Specific to Group Strategy
Development of a high-performance culture
Senior leadership of change management at scale
Transformation and business disruption experience
Innovation and entrepreneurism
Government relations
Union relations
Environment and Corporate Social Responsibility experience
Subject-matter Expertise
Development and execution of business strategy
Governance experience
Large-company leadership experience
Finance/accounting expertise
Audit committee/risk management experience
Regulatory knowledge and experience
Health and safety experience
HR Learning and development experience
Financial markets experience
Community and iwi relationships
Shareholder and investor relations experience
Takeover Protocols
The Company has takeover protocols in place that meet the requirements of the NZX Corporate Governance Code.
Board Evaluation
The Chair, from time to time, with the assistance of appropriate external advisors, regularly assesses the performance of individual
Directors, while Directors also assess the collective performance of the Board and the performance of the Chair. A Board evaluation was
undertaken in October 2025 and an independent review will be undertaken in FY27.
Board Tenure
The Constitution provides that the minimum size of the Board shall not at any time be fewer than five and the Board has fixed the
maximum number of Directors to be 10. Each year, any Director who is required by the NZX Listing Rules or the Company’s Constitution
to retire will retire from office and may offer themselves for re-election at the Annual Shareholders’ Meeting.
The Board does not believe that any Director has served on the Board for a period which could, or could reasonably be perceived to,
materially interfere with the Director’s ability to act in the best interests of the Company. New Directors were most recently appointed to
the Board in 2024 and 2025, and the Board considers that it has an appropriate balance of tenure.
Name of DirectorOriginal
Appointment
Last Reappointed/
Elected
John Journee17 October 201322 November 2024
Dean Hamilton20 April 202024 November 2023
Hamish Rumbold19 November 202528 November 2025
Rachel Taulelei12 February 202122 November 2024
Caroline Rainsford30 August 202228 November 2025
Tony Carter1 May 202422 November 2024
Primary SkillSecondary Skill
Corporate Governance
0-4 years
Director Tenure
4-7 years
7+ years
Principle 3 – Board Committees
“The Board should use committees where this will enhance its effectiveness in key areas, while still retaining Board responsibility.”
The Board has established committees that focus on particular areas of the Board’s responsibilities and together ensure the efficient
performance of the Board, and the achievement of corporate governance outcomes. The committees report to the Board on all material
matters and issues requiring Board decisions. From time to time, the Board may create ad hoc committees to examine specific issues
on its behalf. The Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee was disestablished effective 1 December 2025. The current
committee structure is set out in the table below.
Committee Roles and Responsibilities MembershipMeetings
People and
Remuneration
Committee
Review and make recommendations in relation
to the human resources strategy, the Company’s
remuneration policies and practices, and the
remuneration and performance of the Group
Chief Executive Officer.
Comprised of at least three non-executive
directors, and at least a majority independent
Directors.
Current members:
Rachel Taulelei (Chair), Caroline Rainsford, John
Journee, Hamish Rumbold
At least twice a year
Corporate
Governance and
Nominations
Committee
Ensure a high level of corporate governance
through continuous monitoring of international
corporate governance best practice as
promulgated by the relevant authoritative bodies.
Ensure that the Board is populated with an
appropriate mix of skills and experience among its
members, who collectively provide the diversity of
thought and judgement required.
Comprised of at least three members, at least a
majority of whom are independent Directors.
Current members:
Dean Hamilton (Chair), John Journee, Rachel
Taulelei
At least once a year
Disclosure
Committee
Support the Company in meeting its disclosure
obligations as set out in the NZX Listing Rules,
the Companies Act 1993 and any other applicable
regulations.
Comprised of the Board Chair, Chair of the
Audit and Risk Committee, Group Chief
Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer,
Disclosure Officer and any other Director
appointed by the Board as a member.
Current members:
Dean Hamilton (Chair), John Journee, Group
CEO, CFO and Company Secretary
Held as required
Audit and Risk
Committee
Assist the Board to fulfil its audit and risk
responsibilities.
Review the Company’s annual Sustainability
Report and sustainability-related risks.
Comprised of at least three non-executive
Directors, the majority of whom must be
independent. The Chair will be independent and
may not be the Chair of the Company.
Current members:
Dean Hamilton (Chair), Tony Carter, John
Journee
At least quarterly
Health, Safety
and Wellbeing
Committee
Assist the Board to govern health, safety and
wellbeing.
Comprised of all Directors
Chair: Tony Carter
At the discretion of
the committee Chair
or if requested by any
committee member or
the Group Chief Executive
Officer
Board Meetings and Attendance
The table below outlines the number of meetings of the Board and Board committees during the year ended 2 August 2026 and
Director attendance at those meetings.
DirectorBoardAudit
and Risk
Committee
People and
Remuneration
Committee
Corporate
Governance and
Nominations
Committee
Health, Safety
and Wellbeing
Committee
Disclosure
Committee
Environmental
and Social
Sustainability
Committee
1
Number of
Meetings
146 4 14 7 3
John Journee
2
1462 -4 7 3
Tony Carter 146 - -4 1
3
-
Dean Hamilton
4
12 6 - 13 7 -
Rachel Taulelei 13 2
3
4 -
5
4 3
3
3
Caroline
Rainsford
12
-
4 -4 --
Hamish
Rumbold
6
5 1
3
2-3- -
Dame Joan
Withers
7
732 11 3 2
Robbie Tindall
7
5 -1 1- - 3
1. The Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee was disestablished
effective 1 December 2025
2. Appointed as member of Audit and Risk Committee, People and Remuneration
Committee, and Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee, all effective
28 November 2025
3. Non-committee member in attendance
4. Appointed as Chair of Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee
effective 18 March 2026
5. Appointed as member of Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee
effective 18 March 2026
6. Appointed to the Board effective 19 November 2025 and as member of the
People and Remuneration Committee effective 20 February 2026
7. Resigned from the Board effective 28 November 2025
6968
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Corporate Governance
Principle 4 – Reporting and Disclosure
“The Board should demand integrity in financial and non-financial reporting and in the timeliness and balance of corporate disclosures.”
The Board is committed to providing full and timely financial and non-financial information that is accurate, balanced, meaningful and
consistent. As a listed company, keeping the market informed is a key component to ensuring that its securities are valued fairly.
Market Disclosure Policy
The Company has a Market Disclosure Policy that describes the processes designed to ensure that the Company meets its reporting and
disclosure objectives and all disclosure obligations under the NZX Listing Rules.
To assist the Company with its Market Disclosure Policy, the Board has appointed a Disclosure Committee. The Committee is responsible
for making decisions on what should be disclosed publicly under the Market Disclosure Policy. The Company Secretary is the Disclosure
Officer of the Company and has responsibility for ensuring compliance with the continuous disclosure requirements and overseeing and
co-ordinating disclosure to the market.
Publication of Key Governance Documents
The Company publishes its Code of Ethics, Board and Committee Charters, Director Letter of Appointment and key Company policies in
the Corporate Governance section of its website, www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz
Financial Reporting
The Audit and Risk Committee oversees the quality and integrity of external financial reporting including the accuracy, completeness
and timeliness of financial statements and is committed to providing balanced, clear and objective financial reporting. It reviews half-
yearly and annual financial statements and makes recommendations to the Board concerning accounting policies, areas of judgement,
compliance with accounting standards, stock exchange and legal requirements, and the results of the external and internal audit.
Management accountability for the integrity of the Company’s financial reporting is reinforced by certification from the Group CEO
and the Group CFO. The Group CEO and CFO have provided the Board with written confirmation that the Company’s financial report
presents a true and fair view, in all material respects, of the Company’s financial position for the year ended 2 August 2026, and that
operational results are in accordance with relevant accounting standards.
Non-financial Reporting
Under the Group’s integrated reporting framework, we recognise that our networks, customers, communities, suppliers, people and our
environment all contribute to our retail value creation – and our own culture and values.
The Group reports its financial and non-financial results and outcomes annually, including our contribution to the community, key
people metrics including gender and health and safety, as well as our impact on the environment. This year we have reported these
results and outcomes across our Annual Integrated Report and Sustainability Report.
Principle 5 – Remuneration Report
“The remuneration of directors and executives should be transparent, fair and reasonable.”
Group Remuneration Philosophy
The Group’s remuneration policy supports the Group in attracting, retaining and motivating high-calibre diverse team members to
achieve the Company’s business objectives and create shareholder value.
The Group’s remuneration policy is guided by the principles that remuneration practice should::
• Be clearly aligned with the Group’s vision, values and corporate strategy
• Support the attraction, retention and engagement of team members
• Appropriately reflect market practice and conditions
• Recognise individual performance and competency
• Recognise team and company performance in the creation of shareholder value
Executive Leadership Team Remuneration
The Chief Executive Officer and direct reports to the Chief Executive Officer (Executive Leadership Team or ELT) have their remuneration
reviewed annually by the People and Remuneration Committee and from time to time a third-party remuneration consultant is also
used to benchmark the total remuneration packages of the ELT against a peer group of companies. The People and Remuneration
Committee recommends any proposed changes to the Board for approval. The ELT’s remuneration is made up of the following
components:
• Fixed annual base salary
• Short-term incentive based on the Group’s financial targets
• Long-term incentive based on a performance measure over a three-year period.
ELT members are also eligible to receive an employer KiwiSaver contribution of up to a maximum of 3.5% of gross taxable earnings if
they belong to KiwiSaver.
Short-Term Incentives
The Group’s short-term incentive (STI) scheme for the ELT is designed to link at-risk incentive payments to the achievement of the
Group’s desired financial outcomes. The targets are reviewed and set each year. The STI on-target dollar value for each ELT participant
ranges from 40-50% of base salary. The maximum payment under the STI scheme is reviewed and set each year and in FY26 was 120%
of the on-target dollar value. For FY27 the maximum will also be set at 120%.
In FY26, after FY25’s disappointing operating profit of $1.3m, the Group adopted Group Earnings Before Interest and Tax (EBIT) as its
single performance measure for STI to drive a greater focus on operational profit growth. In May 2026, the Board reviewed and adjusted
the Group EBIT target to $20m, to reflect changing market conditions. After payment of STI, the Group EBIT achieved was $22.6m which
entitled STI participants to 120% of their on-target dollar amount. The Board, however, exercised its discretion to pay 100% rather than
120%.
For FY27 the Group has again adopted purely financial
performance measures as part of its ongoing focus on operational
profit with the weighting of each measure dependent on the
participant’s role. For ELT members whose role has a group focus
their performance measure is weighted 100% to Group EBIT. For
ELT members whose role has a brand focus 80% of their STI will
be weighted to Brand EBIT and 20% to Group EBIT. For those
roles with a merchandise focus 40% of their STI will be weighted
to Gross Margin Return on Inventory Investment (GMROI) targets,
40% on Brand EBIT and 20% on Group EBIT. There is a gate
opener to payment in the FY27 scheme of achieving 90% of the
Group NPAT budget.
Long-Term Incentives
Members of the ELT are eligible to participate in the Group’s long-
term incentive (LTI) scheme. The objective of the LTI scheme is to:
• Ensure the LTIs of the eligible ELT members are closely aligned
with shareholder outcomes
• Provide an incentive to eligible ELT members who are considered
to be key to the future success of the Group, to retain the services
of those eligible ELT members in the future
• Provide a longer-term recognition and reward for eligible ELT
members’ contribution to the future success of the Group.
The LTI on-target dollar value for each ELT participant is 40% of
base salary and for the Chief Executive Officer it is 50% of base
salary. Payments under the cash-based schemes have been
capped and that cap is reviewed each year and for the FY26
scheme the cap was 150% of the on-target dollar value.
The FY24 LTI scheme’s performance period ended on 31 July 2026
and was a cash-settled scheme, and the performance target was
absolute Total Shareholder Return (TSR) against the Group’s cost
of equity plus 1% over a three-year performance period. There
were only three participants from the existing ELT in that scheme,
and the performance hurdle was not achieved and no payment
was made. One other executive had previously been granted a
long-term retention incentive equivalent to 100% of their LTI
target amount and was awarded the payment which will be paid
in FY27.
Directors’ Remuneration
The current Directors’ fee pool limit is $990,000, which was
approved by the shareholders at the 26 November 2021 Annual
Shareholders’ Meeting. Fees are paid for Board and committee
roles as indicated below. Directors are reimbursed for reasonable
travel and other costs associated with fulfilling their role. The
Chair does not receive additional fees for membership of Board
committees.
Board/Committee NamePositionFees (Per Annum)
Board of DirectorsChair
$200,000
1
Member
$87,000
Audit and Risk CommitteeChair
$27,500
Member
$10,000
People and Remuneration
Committee
Chair
$25,000
Member
$6,600
Health, Safety and Wellbeing
Committee
Chair
$20,000
Member-
Corporate Governance and
Nominations Committee
Chair-
Member-
Disclosure CommitteeChair-
Member-
Environmental and Social
Sustainability Committee
2
Chair
$20,000
Member
$6,000
1. Includes attendance at committee meetings. Chair fee was $182,600 per annum
until 28 November 2025
2. The Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee was disestablished
effective 1 December 2025
7170
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Directors’ Remuneration FY26
The fees paid to non-executive Directors for services in their capacity as Directors during the year ended 2 August 2026, totalling
$914,709, were paid as set out below.
Name of Director
Board
Fees
Audit
and Risk
Committee
People and
Remuneration
Committee
Corporate
Governance
and Nominations
Committee
Disclosure
Committee
Health, Safety
and Wellbeing
Committee
Environmental
and Social
Sustainability
Committee
3
Shares
and Other
Payments
or Benefits
Total
Individual
Remuneration
John Journee
1
(Director until 28
November 2025,
then Chair)
$162,333-
(member from 28
November 2025)
-
(member from 28
November 2025)
-
(member from 28
November 2025)
-
(member)
-
(member)
$2,200
(member)
$148,000
4
$312,533
Tony Carter
$87,000$10,000
(member)
---$20,000
(Chair)
--$117,000
Dean Hamilton
$87,000$27,500
(Chair)
--
(member until 18
March 2026, then
Chair)
-
(Chair)
-
(member)
--$114,500
Caroline Rainsford
$87,000-$6,600
(member)
---
(member)
--$93,600
Rachel Taulelei
$87,000-$25,000
(Chair)
-
(member from 18
March 2026)
--
(member)
$2,750
(member)
-$114,750
Hamish Rumbold
2
$60,292-$3,300
(member from 20
February 2026)
---
(member)
--$63,592
Dame Joan Withers
1
(Chair until 28
November 2025)
$60,867-
(member until 28
November 2025)
-
(member until 28
November 2025)
-
(Chair until 28
November 2025)
-
(member until 28
November 2025)
-
(member until 28
November 2025)
-
(member until 28
November 2025)
-$60,867
Robbie Tindall
1
$29,000-$2,200
(member until 28
November 2025)
-
(member until 28
November 2025)
--
(member until 28
November 2025)
$6,667
(Chair until 28
November 2025)
-$37,867
1. On 28 November 2025, Dame Joan Withers and Robbie Tindall resigned as Directors, John Journee succeeded Dame Joan Withers as Chair of the Board, and John
Journee became a member of the Audit and Risk Committee, the People and Remuneration Committee, the Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee and
the Health, Safety and Wellbeing Committee. These Directors were paid in full for November on the basis of their positions at the start of that month, and were paid
under the new structure from December 2025.
2. Hamish Rumbold was appointed as a Director as of 19 November 2025 and as a member of the People and Remuneration Committee as of 20 February 2026. Mr
Rumbold was paid in full for these positions for November 2025 and February 2026.
3. The Environmental and Social Sustainability Committee was disestablished effective 1 December 2025.
4. John Journee received additional fees of $20,000 (excl. GST) in relation to supporting the transition to Mark Stirton as incoming CEO, and additional fees of $128,000
(excl. GST) for consultancy services in relation to a project being considered by the Company.
Remuneration Report
1. Chief Executive Officer remuneration ($000s)
Base PackagePay for Performance
Mark StirtonSalaryTaxable
Benefits
SubtotalSTILTISubtotalTotal Remuneration
Paid in FY261,200491,249375--1,624
Earned in
FY26
1,200541,254600--1,854
Explanation of the above remuneration packages:
1. The $375,000 STI paid to Mark Stirton in FY26 related to the FY25 financial year and to his role as Group Chief Financial Officer and was a guaranteed short-term
retention incentive.
2. The $600,000 STI earned by Mark Stirton in FY26 in his role as Group Chief Executive Officer will be paid in FY27 and represented a 100% payment of his on-
target dollar amount for achieving the Group EBIT performance measure for FY26. For FY26 Mark Stirton was guaranteed 50% of his on target STI dollar amount
and half of the FY26 STI guarantee, on an after-tax basis, was required to be invested in Company shares and held for the duration of Mark Stirton’s tenure as
Group Chief Executive Officer.
3. No LTI vested in FY26.
2. Five-year summary of CEO remuneration ($000s) paid in the financial year
Year Group CEO Total Earnings PaidBase Taxable Benefits STISTI as % of
Maximum
LTIAdditional
Payment
2026 Mark Stirton 1,624 1,200 49 375
2025 John Journee 1,737 1,603 50 - - - 84
2024 John Journee 332 323 9 - - - -
2024 Nick Grayston 4,220 1,354 123 567 - - 2,176
2023 Nick Grayston 2,793 1,588 81 189 20% 935 189
Explanation of the above items:
1. John Journee joined the Group in May 2024 as Interim Group Chief Executive Officer. John Journee’s remuneration was solely fixed remuneration with no STI
or LTI available. John Journee stepped down on 31 July 2025, and Mark Stirton commenced as the new Group Chief Executive Officer on 1 August 2025.
2. The actual remuneration paid includes holiday pay paid as per New Zealand legislation.
3. Taxable benefits are the value of employer KiwiSaver contributions.
4. The $84,000 additional payment to John Journee in FY25 was the payout of holiday pay at the end of John Journee’s employment.
Corporate Governance
3. Breakdown of Mark Stirton’s Group Chief Executive Officer Remuneration Package Structure (2026) ($000s)
Remuneration ComponentDescriptionTarget Value
Fixed RemunerationAnnual Base Salary1,200
KiwiSaver annualised on base 36
Short-Term Incentives (STI) Target value of STI 600
Long-term Incentives (LTI) Target value of LTI 600
Annual Total Package Annual Total Package at Target 2,436
4. Breakdown of Mark Stirton’s Group Chief Executive Officer’s Potential Remuneration and Pay for Performance (2027) ($000s)
Remuneration ComponentDescriptionAt TargetAt Maximum
Fixed RemunerationAnnual Base Salary1,3001,300
KiwiSaver annualised45.545.5
Short-Term Incentives (STI) Cash-based STI shown at on target and at maximum (120%)650780
Long-term Incentives (LTI) Under review for FY27, but based on FY26 would be a
maximum of 150%
650975
Annual Total Package Annual Total Fixed plus Incentive Remuneration 2,6463,101
5. Mark Stirton’s LTI Schemes
Year Invited% of salarySettlementPerformance PeriodMeasure
FY25*40%CashAugust 2024 to July 2027 Absolute TSR against the Company’s cost of equity plus 1%
over a three-year performance period
FY2650%CashAugust 2025 to July 2028 Absolute TSR against the Company’s cost of equity plus 1%
over a three-year performance period
FY2750%Under ReviewAugust 2026 to July 2029 Under Review
* This LTI grant was awarded while Mark Stirton was the Group Chief Financial Officer
6. Five-year summary of Total Shareholder Return (TSR) Performance
FY22FY23FY24
FY25
FY26
5.0%
0.0%
-5.0%
-10.0%
-15.0%
-20.0%
-25.0%
-30.0%
-35.0%
-40.0%
-45.0%
2.5%
-41.5%-41.5%
-30.1%
-13.9%
7. Required disclosures per guidelines
DescriptionPerformance Measures
TSR MethodologyTotal Shareholder Return has been calculated as the movement in the share price during the period plus
any dividends paid.
Board Discretion Discretion exercised in reduction of STI payout for FY26 from 120% to 100%.
Omissions No information has been omitted relating to CEO remuneration.
Any other items There are no other items payable to the CEO that have not been disclosed.
Benefits There are no benefits attributable to the CEO due to any loans made.
WithholdingsNo part of the CEO remuneration has been withheld for any purpose.
Related Parties No related parties are involved with the CEO remuneration.
The ratio of CEO total remuneration to the median of The Warehouse Group employee total remuneration paid in FY26 is 29:1. This ratio
reflects the fact that approximately 80% of The Warehouse Group’s 10,000 team members are employed in its stores and distribution
centres and are paid retail market rates for those roles.
7372
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Team Members’ Remuneration
Grouped below, in accordance with section 211(1)(g) of the Companies Act 1993, are the number of Team Members or former Team
Members, not being Directors or former Directors, who received remuneration and other benefits valued at, or exceeding $100,000,
during the accounting period. Remuneration includes redundancy payments and termination payments made during the year to Team
Members whose remuneration would not otherwise have been included in the table reported below.
Corporate Governance
Remuneration
($000)
Number of Team
Members
100 - 110122
110 - 12082
120 - 13092
130 - 14078
140 - 15074
150 - 16036
160 - 17022
170 - 18026
180 - 19030
190 - 20024
200 - 21019
210 - 22014
220 - 2308
Remuneration
($000)
Number of Team
Members
230 - 2408
240 - 2508
250 - 2604
260 - 2703
270 - 2803
280 - 2905
300 - 3102
310 - 3203
330 - 3402
350 - 3601
370 - 3801
380 - 3901
400 - 4102
Remuneration
($000)
Number of Team
Members
410 - 4202
420 - 4301
440 - 4501
500 - 5101
510 - 5201
520 - 5303
580 - 5901
670 - 6801
1,000 - 1,0101
1,160 - 1,1701
1,620 - 1,6301
Principle 7 – Auditors
“The Board should ensure the quality and independence of the
external audit process.”
Approach to Audit Governance
The independence of the external auditor is of particular
importance to shareholders and the Board. The Audit and Risk
Committee is responsible for overseeing the external audit of the
Company. Accordingly, it monitors developments in the areas of
audit to ensure its policies and practices are consistent with best
practice in these areas.
The Board has adopted a policy on audit independence, the key
elements of which are:
• The external auditor must remain independent of the Company at
all times and must comply with all relevant ethical requirements
and professional standards regarding independence
• The external auditor must monitor its independence and annually
report to the Board that it has remained independent
• The audit firm is permitted to provide certain non-audit services,
set out in the Audit and Risk Committee Charter, that are
not considered to be in conflict with the preservation of the
independence of the auditor
• The Audit and Risk Committee must approve all non-audit work
assignments that are awarded to an external auditor, and the
value of non-audit work must be reported at every Board meeting.
Engagement of the External Auditor
PwC was appointed by the Company’s shareholders at the
2004 Annual Shareholders’ Meeting in accordance with the
provisions of the Companies Act 1993 (Act). PwC is automatically
reappointed as auditor under section 207T of the Act.
Attendance at the Annual Shareholders’ Meeting
PwC, as auditor of the 2026 Financial Statements, has been
invited to attend this year’s Annual Shareholders’ Meeting and
will be available to answer questions about the conduct of the
audit, preparation and content of the auditor’s report, accounting
policies adopted by the Company and the independence of the
auditor in relation to the conduct of the audit.
The Company’s corporate legal advisors, Russell McVeagh, will also
attend the Annual Shareholders’ Meeting.
Internal Audit
The Company has an internal audit function that is independent
of the Company’s external auditors. The internal audit function of
the Company is undertaken by the Company’s own internal audit
team with the assistance of a co-source internal audit partner,
KPMG. The internal audit team reports to, and is directed by, the
Audit and Risk Committee.
Each year, the internal audit programme is approved by the Audit
and Risk Committee. The programme of audit work considers
significant areas of business risk in the Company and is developed
following discussions with Management, review of business
changes and major projects that are planned or currently under
way, and consideration of strategic risks relevant to the Company.
The role of internal audit is to:
• Evaluate the design and operating effectiveness of controls
governing key operations, processes and business risks
• Provide the Board with an assessment, independent of Management,
as to the adequacy of those internal operating and financial controls
• Assist the Board in meeting its corporate governance and
regulatory responsibilities.
Principle 8 – Shareholder Rights and
Relations
“The Board should respect the rights of shareholders and foster
constructive relationships with shareholders that encourage them
to engage with the issuer.”
The Company’s website contains a comprehensive set of investor-
related material and data, including key NZX disclosures and
media releases, interim and annual reports, shareholder meeting
materials and the Company’s governance charters and policies.
The Company has an investor relations programme which
includes communication through:
• Periodic and continuous disclosure to the NZX
• Annual reports
• Sustainability reports
• The Annual Shareholders’ Meeting
• The Company’s website, which includes financial and operational
information, and key corporate governance information
• Analyst and investor briefings and roadshows.
Engagement with Investors
The Company values its dialogue with strategic stakeholders,
institutional and retail investors, and research analysts, and
believes effective engagement benefits both the Company and
investors. Annual Shareholders’ Meetings, analyst and investor
briefings and roadshows provide an important opportunity for
this dialogue. Shareholders also have the opportunity to submit
questions and comments through investors@thewarehouse.co.nz.
Annual Shareholders’ Meeting (ASM)
The ASM provides an opportunity for Directors, the Group CEO,
the executive leadership team, and the Company’s external
auditor to meet shareholders and answer any questions they
may have. The ASM is held at a convenient time and location. The
2025 ASM was held on 28 November 2025. The Notice of Annual
Shareholders’ Meeting was published on 31 October 2025.
In accordance with the Companies Act 1993 and NZX Listing
Rules, the Company refers any significant matters to shareholders
for approval at the ASM, and shareholders are given the
opportunity to vote by proxy ahead of the meeting or by polling if
attending the meeting in person or online.
Electronic Communication
The Company continues to prioritise electronic reporting as
part of its commitment to cost effectiveness and minimising
environmental impact. Shareholders can request a copy of the
Annual Report to be sent to them free of charge by contacting
MUFG Pension & Market Services, the Company’s share registrar.
Shareholders are encouraged to provide their email addresses
to MUFG Pension & Market Services to enable them to receive all
shareholder materials electronically.
MUFG Pension & Market Services
Telephone: +64 9 375 5998
Email: enquiries.nz@cm.mpms.mufg.com
Principle 6 – Risk Management
“Directors should have a sound understanding of the material risks faced by the issuer and how to manage them. The Board should
regularly verify that the issuer has appropriate processes that identify and manage potential and material risks.”
Risk Management Framework
Risk is the chance of something happening that will have an impact on business objectives. Having established an acceptable risk
tolerance, the Company’s approach is to identify, analyse, evaluate and appropriately manage risk in the business.
Material Risks Identified
Information on material risks the Company faces and how they are managed is set out on pages 20 to 22 of this Annual Report.
Risk Management Roles and Responsibilities
The Board is responsible for reviewing and approving the Company’s risk management strategy. The Board delegates day-to-day
management of risk to the Group CEO, who may further delegate such responsibilities to executive and other officers. Inherent in this
delegation is the belief that responsibility for managing risks in the business is the domain of the business unit.
Risk Monitoring and Evaluation
While the Board is ultimately responsible for the risk management of the Company, the Audit and Risk Committee reviews the reports
of Management and the external and internal auditors on the effectiveness of systems for internal control, financial reporting and
risk management. To assist in discharging this responsibility, the Board has in place a number of strategies designed to safeguard the
Company’s assets and interests and ensure the integrity of reporting. These reports include quarterly reviews of store audit results and
non-store internal audit findings, and half-yearly reviews of key enterprise risks.
Health and Safety
The Company’s approach and process on health and safety matters are set out on page 16 of The Warehouse Group Sustainability Report
which can be found on its website www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz
Indemnity and Insurance
In accordance with section 162 of the Companies Act 1993 and the Constitution of the Company, the Company has provided insurance
for, and indemnities to, Directors and certain employees of the Company and its subsidiaries for losses from actions undertaken in the
course of their legitimate duties.
7574
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Corporate Governance
Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion
The Company values diversity, and the provision of equal opportunities for all employees and those looking to join the Company is
fundamental to the way we operate as a business.
For the year ended 2 August 2026 the Board is satisfied that the Company achieved its objective in relation to gender pay equity. The
Company did not achieve its objective of female representation in senior leadership. The Company intends to undertake a review of its
diversity and inclusion objectives in FY27, including initiatives required to achieve those objectives.
The Group strives to create a workplace where our people can bring their whole selves to work. Not only is this the right thing to do for
our team members, we also believe that a diverse team and an inclusive workplace leads to more innovation, better decision-making,
more opportunities for all our people and the communities in which we operate, and better performance outcomes for the Company.
That is why we’re committed to continuously identifying ways we can improve diversity and inclusivity.
Actual as at 2 August 2026 (based on employee headcount)
Focus Area: Gender
ObjectiveImprove representation of women at senior levels of business
Target20252026
50% of senior
leadership roles
held by women
Female representation
by role
FemaleMaleGender
diverse/
not
disclosed
Total % of
female
FemaleMaleGender
diverse/
not
disclosed
Total % of
female
Board 34-742.9%24633.3%
Executives 25-728.6%2101216.7%
Direct report to executive
team
1718-3548.6%22305242.3%
Total Leadership1923-4245.2%2440-6437.5%
Other 5,4854,052109,54757.5%5,3673,86099,23658.1%
Total Employees (excluding
Board)
5,5044,075109,58957.4%5,3913,90099,30058.0%
Female representation by
employee status
FemaleMaleGender
diverse/
not
disclosed
Total % of
female
FemaleMaleGender
diverse/
not
disclosed
Total % of
female
Permanent 4,566 3,349 8 7,923 57.6% 4,340 3,171 6 7,517 57.7%
Fixed Term 72 37 109 66.1% 67 53 1 121 55.4%
Casual 866 689 2 1,557 55.6% 984 676 2 1,662 59.2%
Female representation by
full/part-time employment
FemaleMaleGender
diverse/
not
disclosed
Total % of
female
FemaleMaleGender
diverse/
not
disclosed
Total % of
female
Full-time 2,579 2,199 3 4,781 53.9% 2,371 2,104 4 4,479 52.9%
Part-time 2,059 1,187 5 3,251 63.3% 2,036 1,120 3 3,159 64.5%
Casual 866 689 2 1,557 55.6% 984 676 2 1,662 59.2%
100% Gender pay
equity (undisclosed
gender data is not
included)
CategoryNumber of employees
in each category
Median pay ratioMedian
gender
pay gap
Number of employees
in each category
Median pay ratioMedian
gender
pay gap
The Warehouse Group
- Total
9,578 100.0%0.0% 9,291100.0%0.0%
Leadership 3483.0%17.0%6473.4%26.6%
SSO 87485.0%15.0%74395.4%4.6%
Stores 8,212100.0%0.0%7,829100.0%0.0%
Distribution Centres 45897.0%3.0%65596.1%3.9%
Focus Area: Age
20252026
Age RepresentationUnder 30 years old30-50 years oldOver 50 years oldUnder 30 years old30-50 years oldOver 50 years old
#%#%#%#%#%#%
Board - - 3 37.5% 5 62.5% 2 33.3% 4 66.7%
Executives - - 4 57.1% 3 42.9% 7 58.3% 5 41.7%
Direct report to executive team - - 21 60.0% 14 40.0% 1 1.9% 33 63.5% 18 34.6%
Other 4,427 46.4% 3,207 33.6% 1,908 20.0% 4,166 45.1% 3,254 35.2% 1,814 19.6%
Total (106 were non-disclosed) 4,427 46.2% 3,235 33.7% 1,930 20.1% 4,167 44.8% 3,296 35.4% 1,841 19.8%
7776
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Statutory Disclosures
Disclosures of Interests by Directors
General disclosures
The following are particulars of general disclosures of interest given by the Directors of The Warehouse Group Limited pursuant to
section 140(2) of the Companies Act 1993 during FY26.
DirectorEntityInterest
John JourneeFarmlands Society
Colonial Motor Company Limited
CMC Workplace Savings Scheme Trustee Limited
Vanishing Point Limited
Data Insights Group Limited
Director and Shareholder
Director and Shareholder
Director
Director and Shareholder
Advisory Board Member and Shareholder
Dean HamiltonFulton Hogan Limited
Auckland International Airport Limited
Tappenden Holdings Limited
Ryman Healthcare Limited
Chair and Shareholder
Director and Shareholder
Director
Chair and Shareholder
Antony CarterThe Interiors Group HoldCo Limited
Skin Institute Holding Company Limited
Datacom Group Limited
TR Group Limited
My Food Bag Group Limited
Ravensdown Limited
Sanford Limited
Capital Solutions Limited
Capital Training Limited
Loughborough Investments Limited
Maurice Carter Charitable Trust
Tony and Frances Carter Family Trust
Antony Carter Family Trust No 2
Chair
Chair
Chair
Chair
Chair
Director
Director
Board Advisor
Advisor
Director and Shareholder
Trustee
Trustee
Trustee
Caroline RainsfordGoogle New Zealand
Otereti Limited
Auckland Art Gallery Toi o Tāmaki
2
Country Director New Zealand
Director
Advisory Committee Member
Hamish RumboldRyman Healthcare Limited
Perigee HoldCo Limited (trading as OrbitRemit)
Livestock Improvement Corporation Limited
House of Travel Holdings Limited
Capio(b) Limited
Antler Trust
Antler Investment Trust
Evolution Healthcare
New Zealand Superfund
Constantinople
Director
Chair
Director
Director
Director and Shareholder
Trustee
Trustee
Advisor
Technology Advisor
Advisor
Rachel TauleleiWellington International Airport Limited
Oho 2021 Limited
ANZCO Foods Limited
CWBG Limited
Tokomanawa Queens Foundation
NZ Rugby Appointments and Remuneration Panel
Huia Publishing
Mercury NZ Limited
Fonterra Sustainability Panel
2
Sealord Group Limited
2
Kura Limited
2
Aotearoa Fisheries Limited t/a Moana New Zealand
2
Wellington Regional Stadium Trust
2
Director
Director and Shareholder
Director
Director and Shareholder
Chair
Chair
Advisory Board Member
Director
Chair
Director
Director
Director and Chair
Chair
Dame Joan Withers
1
ANZ Bank New Zealand Limited
On Being Bold Limited
Sky Network Television Limited
Sweet Louise Foundation
Origin Energy Limited
Director
Director
Director
Trustee
Director
Robert Tindall
1
The Tindall Foundation
Finn Lowery Foundation
Foundation Services Limited
K One W One Limited and related companies
Trustee
Trustee
Director
Director
1. Ceased to be a director on 28 November 2025. Disclosures detailed are as at this date.
2. No longer an interest as at 2 August 2026.
As at 2 August 2026 Directors, or entities related to them, held relevant interests (as defined in the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013)
in the Company shares as follows:
Beneficial InterestBeneficial InterestNon-beneficial InterestNon-beneficial Interest
2026202520262025
A Carter
70,00040,000
D Hamilton
1
23,50023,5001,493,0571,493,057
J Journee
2
172,000172,000 1,493,057
1. Relevant interest as shareholder of The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited and The Warehouse Management Trustee Company No. 2 Limited, which
each hold shares for the purposes of employee incentive schemes.
2.
Relevant interest (as shareholder of The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited and The Warehouse Management Trustee Company No. 2 Limited, which
each hold shares for the purposes of employee incentive schemes) transferred from Dame Joan Withers to John Journee on 28 November 2025.
Share Dealings by Directors
During the financial year, the Directors disclosed in respect of section 148(2) of the Companies Act 1993 that they acquired or
disposed of a relevant interest in shares as follows:
Share TransactionNature of relevant
interest
Date of
Transaction
Number of Ordinary Shares
Acquired/(Disposed of)
Consideration
Dame J WithersNon-beneficial owner28 November
2025
(1,015,875)
Off-market transfer of 67% of the shares
in The Warehouse Management Trustee
Company Limited (which holds shares in the
Company for the purpose of the employee
incentive scheme)
J JourneeNon-beneficial owner28 November
2025
1,015,875
Off-market acquisition of 67% of the shares
in The Warehouse Management Trustee
Company Limited (which holds shares in the
Company for the purpose of the employee
incentive scheme)
Dame J WithersNon-beneficial owner28 November
2025
(477,182)
Off-market transfer of 66% of the shares
in The Warehouse Management Trustee
Company No. 2 Limited (which holds shares
in the Company for the purpose of the
employee incentive scheme)
J JourneeNon-beneficial owner28 November
2025
477,182
Off-market acquisition of 66% of the shares
in The Warehouse Management Trustee
Company No. 2 Limited (which holds shares
in the Company for the purpose of the
employee incentive scheme)
A CarterBeneficial owner31 March 2026
9,492
On-market purchase of ordinary shares at a
price of $0.6567 per share
A CarterBeneficial owner1 April 2026
20,508
On-market purchase of ordinary shares at a
price of $0.6609 per share
Twenty Largest Registered Shareholders as at 2 August 2026
NameNumber of Ordinary SharesPercentage of Ordinary Shares
Sir Stephen Robert Tindall
93,687,09627.01
The Tindall Foundation Inc
73,920,49621.31
James Pascoe Investments Limited
69,333,94019.99
New Zealand Superannuation Fund Nominees Limited
11,892,1863.43
New Zealand Depository Nominee
8,867,7892.56
Stephen Robert Tindall & John Richard Avery & Brian Mayo Smith
3,778,1491.09
Robert George Tindall & Stephen Robert Tindall & Pupuke Trustee Limited
3,455,1031.00
ASB Nominees Limited
3,094,1000.89
Forsyth Barr Custodians Limited
2,284,6720.66
David George Harper & Karen Elizabeth Harper
2,070,0000.60
Accident Compensation Corporation
1,806,0870.52
Paul Hughes & Tajrena Alexi & CR Trustees Limited
1,750,0000.50
Custodial Services Limited
1,648,9780.48
Citibank Nominees (NZ) Ltd
1,539,6280.44
Rainer Huebner & Shanti Huebner
1,215,0000.35
Peter Duncan Garvan
925,5490.27
Hsu Cheng Yang
850,0000.25
Stephen Robert Tindall & John Richard Avery & Brian Mayo Smith
752,7980.22
The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited
667,1740.19
Guobang Liu
641,3210.18
Total
284,180,06681.94
Note: The shareholding of New Zealand Central Securities Depository Limited (NZCSD) has been reallocated to the applicable members of NZCSD.
7978
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Distribution of Shareholders as at 2 August 2026
Size of ShareholdingNumber of
Shareholders
PercentageNumber of SharesPercentage
1 to 1,000 3,878 43.54% 2,012,603 0.58%
1,001 to 5,000 3,042 34.15% 7,865,737 2.27%
5,001 to 10,000 887 9.96% 6,806,911 1.96%
10,001 to 100,000 993 11.15% 26,192,202 7.55%
100,001 to 500,000 85 0.95% 16,695,169 4.81%
500,001 and Over 22 0.25% 287,270,498 82.83%
Total 8,907 100% 346,843,120 100%
Substantial Product Holders
According to notices given to the Company under the Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013, as at 2 August 2026, the substantial product
holders in the Company and their relevant interests are noted below:
Relevant Interest (Ordinary Shares)Percentage
Stephen Robert Tindall93,687,09627.01
The Tindall Foundation Inc73,920,49621.31
James Pascoe Investments Limited69,333,94019.99
Statutory Disclosures
Subsidiary Company Directors
The following people held office as Directors of subsidiary companies at 2 August 2026. Those who retired during the year are indicated
with an (R).
CompanyDirectors
1-Day Liquor Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)
Altitude NZ Limited (previously Torpedo 7 Limited) M Stirton, S Knight, J Journee (R)
Bond and Bond Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)
Boye Developments Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)
Chocolateworks NZ Limited A Razey, J Andersen, C Cole, S Roest, D Watts, J Hempstead (R)
Eldamos Investments Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)
Eldamos Nominees Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)
Farran (Nine) Limited S Knight, M Davey, G Helsby, G Lane, M Stirton (R)
Lincoln West Limited S Knight, M Davey, G Helsby, G Lane, M Stirton (R)
Noel Leeming Finance Limited B Moors
Noel Leeming Financial Services Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)
Noel Leeming Furniture Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)
Noel Leeming Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)
The Book Depot Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)
The Warehouse Card Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)
The Warehouse Group Support Services Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)
The Warehouse Investments Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)
The Warehouse Limited M Stirton, S Knight, J Journee (R)
The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited D Hamilton, J Journee, Dame J Withers (R)
The Warehouse Management Trustee Company No.2 Limited D Hamilton, J Journee, Dame J Withers (R)
The Warehouse Nominees Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)
The Warehouse Planit Trustees Limited Dame J Withers, J Journee
The Warehouse (Shanghai) Trading Company Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Pook, T Benyon (R), M Anderton (R)
TWGI Operations Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)
TWGA Pty Ltd I McGill, B Moors
TW House Sourcing Private Limited (India) C Srinivasan, B Moors, P Gupta, M Anderton (R)
TWL Australia Pty Limited I McGill, B Moors
TWP No.1 Limited S Knight, M Stirton (R)
TWP No.4 Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)
TWP No.5 Limited S Knight, B Moors, M Stirton (R)
Warehouse Stationery Limited B Moors
8180
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Governance Report
Stock Exchange Listing
The ordinary shares of The Warehouse Group Limited are listed on
the New Zealand Exchange (NZX).
Ordinary Shares
The total number of voting securities of the Company on issue on
2 August 2026 was 346,843,120 fully paid ordinary shares.
Holders of each class of equity security as at 2 August 2026
Class of Equity
Security
Number of Holders Number of Shares or
Rights
Ordinary Shares 8,907 346,843,120
Rights Attaching To Shares
Clauses 20-22 of the Company’s Constitution set out the voting
rights of shareholders. Ordinary shares in the Company each carry
a right to vote on a poll at any general meeting of shareholders on
any resolution. Holders of ordinary shares may vote at a meeting
in person, or by proxy, representative or attorney. Voting may
be conducted by voice, a show of hands or a poll. Each of the
Company’s ordinary shares entitles the holder to one vote.
Escrow
Apart from the shares held under the Staff Purchase Plan, the
Company has no securities subject to an escrow agreement.
Donations
In accordance with section 211(1)(h) of the Companies Act 1993,
the Company records that it donated $46,000 (2025: $18,000)
to various charities during the year. In line with Board policy, no
political contributions were made during the year.
Dividends on Ordinary Shares
The Group’s current Dividend Policy was approved by the Board
in March 2021. The Group’s Dividend Policy is to distribute at least
70% of the Group’s full-year adjusted net profit, at the discretion
of the Board and subject to trading performance, market
conditions and liquidity requirements.
The Board did not declare a final dividend for the financial year
ended 2 August 2026.
Dividends20262025202420232022
Interim--5.0-10.0
Special-----
Final---8.010.0
Total--5.08.020.0
Auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers has continued to act as auditor of
the Company and has undertaken the audit of the financial
statements for the year ended 2 August 2026.
Disciplinary Action
NZX has not taken any disciplinary action against the Company
during the period under review.
NZX Waivers
No waivers have been granted and published by NZX or relied
upon by the Company in the 12 months immediately preceding
The Warehouse Group Limited’s balance date.
Directory
Board of Directors
John Journee (Chair)
Rachel Taulelei
Antony (Tony) Carter
Dean Hamilton
Caroline Rainsford
Hamish Rumbold
Group Chief Executive Officer
Mark Stirton
Group Chief Financial Officer
Stefan Knight
Company Secretary
Silv Roest
Place of Business
26 The Warehouse Way
Northcote, Auckland 0627
PO Box 33470, Takapuna
Auckland 0740, New Zealand
Telephone: +64 9 489 7000
Facsimile: +64 9 489 7444
Website: www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz
Registered Office
26 The Warehouse Way
Northcote, Auckland 0627
New Zealand
New Zealand Business Number
(NZBN)
New Zealand Incorporation:
9429038766633
Auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers
Private Bag 92162
Auckland 1142, New Zealand
Stock Exchange Listing
NZX trading code: WHS
Share Registrar
MUFG Pension & Market Services
(MPMS)
Level 30, PwC Tower, 15 Customs Street West
Auckland 1010
Phone: +64 (09) 375 5998
Email: enquiries.nz@cm.mpms.mufg.com
Website: nz.investorcentre.mpms.mufg.com
Shareholder Enquiries
If you have any general shareholder enquiries,
including questions or comments on this Report,
please contact investors@thewarehouse.co.nz.
Shareholders with enquiries regarding share
transactions, change of address, or dividend
payments should contact the Share Registrar,
per contact details above. Shareholdings can be
managed electronically by using MUFG’s secure
website, www.nz.investorcentre.mpms.mufg.
com
8382
The Warehouse Group Annual Report 2026Directory
thewarehousegroup.co.nz
To build exceptional
retail brands
that customers love, our team take
pride in, and deliver sustainable
shareholder returns
---
Results for announcement to the market
Name of issuer The Warehouse Group Limited
Reporting Period 52 weeks to 2 August 2026
Previous Reporting Period 53 weeks to 3 August 2025
Currency New Zealand dollars
$3,027,587
$3,027,587
$11,234
$11,234
Final Dividend
Record Date Not Applicable
Dividend Payment Date Not Applicable
Contact phone number
Contact email address Stefan.Knight@twgroup.co.nz
Date of release through MAP
Audited financial statements accompany this announcement.
Revenue from continuing
operations
down (1.9)%
The Warehouse Group Limited
Results for announcement (for Equity and Debt Security issuer)
Amount (000s)Percentage change
Total Revenue down (1.9)%
Net profit/(loss) from
continuing operations
up 506.4 %
Total net profit/(loss) up 506.4 %
Amount per Quoted Equity
Security
Not Applicable
Imputed amount per
Quoted Equity Security
Not Applicable
Current periodPrior comparable period
Net tangible assets per
Quoted Equity Security (in dollars
and cents per security)
$0.560 (02 August 2026) $0.464 (03 August 2025)
A brief explanation of any of
the figures above necessary
to enable the figures to be
understood
The Annual Report, investor presentation and media release which accompany
this announcement, provide information and commentary to explain the
financial performance of the Group for the 52 week period ended 2 August
2026.
30 September 2026
Authority for this announcement
Name of person authorised to
make this announcement
Stefan Knight (Group Chief Financial Officer)
Contact person for this
announcement
Stefan Knight (Group Chief Financial Officer)
(09) 489 7000
---
THE WAREHOUSE GROUP
Sustainability
Report
For the reporting period 4 August 2025 to 2 August 2026
Table of Contents
Introduction 3
Chair’s Introduction 4
CEO’s Introduction 5
2026 at a Glance 6
Our Approach to Sustainability 7
About The Warehouse Group 8
Our Sustainable Living Plan 9
Our People 14
Growing Our People and Culture 15
Supporting Our People to Thrive 16
Our Relationships 17
Our Communities 18
Trading Ethically and Responsibly 20
Our Climate Transition and Emissions 24
Our Climate Transition and Emissions 25
Transition Planning 25
Metrics and Targets 27
Our Approach to Sustainability Governance and Risk
Management 31
The Role of our Board 32
The Role of our Management Team 32
Managing Sustainability-related Risks 32
Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Disclosures 33
Appendices 44
Appendix 1 – Greenhouse Gas Emissions Inventory Criteria 45
Appendix 2 – Initiatives and Associations 52
Appendix 3 – Independent Limited Assurance Report 53
About this report
This report covers The Warehouse Group’s environmental and social sustainability
performance for the 52-week period 4 August 2025 to 2 August 2026. It covers the same
entities as our FY26 Annual Report, available at www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/investor-
centre/company-reports. References to “we”, “our”, or “us” are references to the Group.
This year’s report does not include climate statements prepared under the Aotearoa New
Zealand Climate Standards. This follows the Government’s announcement in late 2025
of proposed changes to the regime, which will (once legislation is passed) mean that The
Warehouse Group is no longer a climate reporting entity. In October 2025, the Financial
Markets Authority (FMA) announced “no action” relief for entities that are climate reporting
entities under existing legislation but are expecting their climate reporting obligations to
cease once legislation is passed. This no action relief means that those entities will face no
action from the FMA for failing to meet climate reporting obligations under Part 7A of the
Financial Markets Conduct Act 2013 for their 2025/26 reporting period. We are relying on
the “no action” relief for this reporting period. Our climate transition plan, greenhouse gas
emissions (GHG) and targets, and approach to governance and risk management are covered
on pages 25–32. Our GHG emissions, energy and waste metrics have been independently
assured. This report is not a climate statement that complies with the Aotearoa New Zealand
Climate Standards.
Unless stated otherwise, all data is for the year ended 2 August 2026. Figures may be
rounded, so totals and percentages may not add up exactly. Target years refer to the end of
the relevant financial year unless otherwise stated.
Date published
This report was published on 30 September 2026 and is available on the Group’s website at
https://www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/investor-centre/company-reports.
Enquiries
If you have any questions or comments regarding this report, please contact investors@
thewarehouse.co.nz.
Introduction
Chair’s Introduction
As a Board, we’ve always believed doing the right thing
and doing good business are the same thing. This Group
was striving to be affordably sustainable, making the right
choice the best-value choice, decades before either was
expected of retailers. That hasn’t changed, even as the world
around us has.
This is my first Sustainability Report as Chair, having served
on the Board and in executive roles across the business,
including as Interim Group Chief Executive Officer. It’s a
privilege to keep serving this business.
New Zealand has had another tough year, and households
are still feeling real cost-of-living pressure. We can’t solve
affordability on our own, but as one of the country’s largest
retailers, we know we can play a part, through the value we
offer and how we support the communities we’re part of.
This year the Board reaffirmed the Group’s sustainability
vision, to make sustainable living easy and affordable for
everyone. It shapes how we source, how we treat our people,
and how we show up locally, and that connection to our
wider strategy matters more than ever.
Sustainability sits so close to everything else we oversee
that we changed where that oversight sits this year. We
disestablished the Environmental and Social Sustainability
Committee, moving oversight directly to the Board, with the
Audit and Risk Committee now looking after sustainability-
related risk and reporting. This isn’t a reduction in focus —
quite the opposite, it reflects how integrated into strategy
this work needs to be.
In late 2025, the Government announced proposed changes,
which if passed will mean that we are no longer required
to prepare climate statements under the Aotearoa New
Zealand Climate Standards. For this year, we are relying
on “no action” relief published by the FMA for entities who
expect their reporting obligations to cease, and so are not
preparing compliant climate statements. However, we’ve
chosen to keep reporting on climate-related matters in a
more streamlined way. Transparency here matters to us
regardless of any reporting requirements.
As one reporting requirement eases, another is taking
shape. We are supportive of the proposed Modern Slavery
legislation before Parliament. Respecting the basic human
and labour rights of workers in our supply chain is work
we’ve taken seriously for years. We’ve urged policy makers to
learn lessons from the climate-related disclosures regime,
where New Zealand went further than comparable markets
like Australia, adding complexity without necessarily
delivering a better outcome. Getting that alignment right is
important, both to enable the legislation to work and to help
businesses like ours apply it.
This report shows a business still building for the long
term, even in a demanding year, and I’m proud of our
people’s part in that. On behalf of the Board, thank you
to our management, team members and everyone who
contributed. Doing the right thing isn’t new for us. It’s part
of who we are, and what we’re building on for what comes
next.
Ngā mihi nui,
John Journee
Chair
Doing the right thing and doing good business have
always been the same thing to us - long before
either was expected of retailers.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 20264
IntroductionOur People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
At The Warehouse Group, our purpose is to build exceptional
retail brands that customers love, our team take pride in, and
that deliver sustainable shareholder returns. Sustainability isn’t
an add-on to that, it’s part of how we get there. It guides how
we source, how we reduce waste, and how we show up for the
communities that have backed us since Sir Stephen Tindall
opened our first store in 1982.
This year, we launched This Is Warehouse Country, our brand
platform that reconnects us with our heritage and the role
we’ve played in communities across New Zealand for decades.
It’s a reminder that we’ve never stopped showing up for
families, and a commitment to making The Warehouse feel
like the centre of the community again, not just a place where
people shop.
The Good Drop, our clothing take-back partnership with The
Salvation Army, is a good example of what that looks like in
practice. It had its first full year, growing from five stores to 14
and collecting more than six tonnes of clothing, and receiving
the Sustainability Leadership Award at the Retail NZ Awards.
Our long-running Red Shirts in Schools programme and
The Salvation Army’s Aspire programme, which we helped
establish, remain some of the things I’m proudest of. Watching
young people build confidence through work experience is a
reminder of what this business can do beyond selling products
and services.
We had some real wins elsewhere too. Noel Leeming kept
over 11,000 households’ old appliances out of landfill, and its
repair teams gave around 35,000 products a second life. And
we launched New Zealand’s first Sustainable Supply Chain
Finance facility with HSBC, so suppliers doing the right thing
on sustainability get paid faster, on better terms.
A business only becomes genuinely sustainable when
its people believe in it. This year we focused on bringing
our culture home after a period of significant change,
strengthening leadership capability and giving our people
the consistency they need to do their best work, and I’ve been
pleased with how our teams have leaned into that.
Our continued partnership with Lodestone Energy kept us
moving on our own emissions. Since January 2026, every store
and site across New Zealand where we purchase electricity
has been matched with solar generation. Lower costs, more
certainty and a genuine contribution to New Zealand’s
renewable future – this is sustainability and commercial sense
pointing the same way.
We’re reporting a little differently this year, following proposed
changes to New Zealand’s climate-related disclosures regime,
but our commitment to transparency on emissions, our
transition plan and the risks we’re managing hasn’t changed.
None of this happens without our 10,000 team members, who
kept showing up for customers and communities through a
demanding year. The spirit Sir Stephen built this business on is
still what drives us.
Ngā mihi nui,
Mark Stirton
Group Chief Executive Officer
CEO’s Introduction
Thank you to our team, suppliers and customers who
keep making sustainability something we do, not
something we say.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 20265
IntroductionOur People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
2026 at a Glance
14 stores
offering The Good Drop
clothing reuse and
recycling drop-offs
Winner of the KNAPP Sustainability
Leadership Award at the 2026
Spark Retail NZ Awards
People and Communities
$1.9m
contributed to New
Zealand charities and
communities in FY26
FY26 eNPS reflects Group-
wide survey results across
stores, distribution centres and
head offices. FY25 excluded
distribution centre team
members and is therefore not
directly comparable.
0%
Median Gender
Pay Gap (FY25: 0%)
employee Net
Promoter Score
(FY25: 36)
Group-wide median gender pay
gap was 0% (FY25: 0%), though
differences remain within some
parts of our business
Products and Circularity
of private label sales
with packaging that
met our sustainability
requirements
of post consumer waste
collected for reuse or
recycling
of private label product
sales had at least one
approved sustainability
attribute (FY25: 40%)
66%
284
tonnes
36%
Climate and Operations
of our electricity
matched with
electricity produced
by Lodestone
Energy’s solar farms
reduction in Scope
1 and market-based
Scope 2 emissions
(compared to FY23
base year)
74%90%
of operational waste
diverted from landfill
(FY25: 79%)
79%
Ethical and Responsible Sourcing
Tier 1 private label
factory social and
environmental
assessments completed
of direct sourcing
private label factory
spend covered by
verified carbon
maturity assessments
49255%
New Zealand’s first Sustainable
Supply Chain Finance facility
launched with HSBC
Our Approach
to Sustainability
About The Warehouse
Group
The Group was founded by Sir Stephen Tindall in 1982, and has
evolved from a single The Warehouse store, to become one of
the largest retailing groups in New Zealand. Our brands include
The Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery and Noel Leeming. We
have 217 retail stores across New Zealand, as well as online
stores and apps, and our two distribution centres. We also have
three overseas sourcing hubs located in China, Bangladesh and
India. We are a people-centred business with approximately
10,000 team members across our locations, serving more than
one million Kiwis in our stores each week.
Our purpose is to build exceptional retail brands that customers
love, our team take pride in, and deliver sustainable shareholder
returns. Our ambition is to be a highly desired retail stock. We’re
focused on delivering the best products at the best price, with
outstanding customer experiences to achieve our objectives
and to deliver on our long-term strategy and growth for our
shareholders and all stakeholders.
From the beginning, we’ve aimed to be a company that cares –
putting people first, supporting our communities, and working
towards a more sustainable future. We know sustainability
matters to many of our customers, but we also recognise that
many are finding it tougher than ever to make ends meet.
Our aspiration has always been to enhance quality of life in
New Zealand by making the desirable affordable – and that
aspiration remains at the heart of our business today.
This year, 44 years on from that first store, we launched our new
platform This Is Warehouse Country – reconnecting with the
communities we’ve never stopped showing up for and renewing
our ambition to be New Zealand’s most loved retailer again.
Our value chain
We run a straightforward retail model: we buy, move and sell.
Across our family of brands – The Warehouse, Warehouse
Stationery and Noel Leeming – we source from local and
international suppliers, move products through our distribution
network, and sell nationwide through stores and online.
Our offerings span everyday essentials and groceries, clothing,
homeware, toys, consumer electronics and whiteware, plus
complex technology products and services (e.g. installation,
repair and protection plans). We sell a mix of private label
and well-known third-party brands, serving both household
shoppers and commercial customers such as insurers,
government agencies, schools and businesses.
Our Purpose
To build exceptional retail
brands that customers
love, our team take pride
in, and deliver sustainable
shareholder returns
Our Ambition
Be a highly desired retail stock
Our Values
Think Customer | Do Good |
Own It
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 20268
IntroductionOur Approach
to Sustainability
Our People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
Our Sustainable Living Plan
Sustainability is integral to how we deliver our strategy: building exceptional retail
brands that customers love, our team take pride in, and delivering sustainable
shareholder returns. Our Sustainable Living Plan is embedded in the decisions that
shape our business every day: from how products are sourced and made, to how waste
is reduced, to how value is created for customers, teams and communities.
Last year we reviewed the Plan against the Group’s strategy, reaffirmed its vision, and
sharpened our four Building Blocks into 12 action areas. In FY26, as part of the Group’s
wider strategy refresh process, we continued considering how our long-standing
community and people priorities sit alongside our environmental commitments, and
how our approach may evolve from here.
Our ambition is underpinned by goals and metrics across each Building Block, enabling
us to track progress, respond to emerging risks and expectations, and maintain strong
governance – including through our Climate Transition Plan, which guides our journey
to a lower-carbon, more climate-resilient business that supports a just transition.
The Sustainable Living Plan runs through every part of The Warehouse Group, helping
us safeguard product quality and availability, build resilience across our supply chain,
and support the communities we serve.
What follows is a summary of progress against each Building Block. Many goals were
reset last year, with our supplier engagement goal updated this year to focus on supplier
carbon-management maturity. Some areas remain at an early stage, while others are
well on track.
Product Sustainability LeadershipSustainable Living SolutionsCircularity Solutions for CustomersSustainable Operations
Value Chain Emissions
Product Sustainability Attributes
Packaging Sustainability
Supplier Engagement
Reducing Customer Emissions
Product Efficiency
Customer Reward
Post Consumer Solutions
Circular Innovation
Operational Emissions
Operational Efficiency
Reduced Waste
We will improve the sustainability
of our products and aim to cut
GHG emissions across our value
chain in line with climate science.
We will offer a range of innovative
solutions that aim to help our
customers live a more sustainable
lifestyle.
We will provide a range of
solutions that aim to help products
last longer and reduce
post-consumer waste going to
landfill
We will improve the sustainability
performance of our operations and
aim to reduce our operational GHG
emissions to zero
Ethical and Responsible Sourcing
We will source ethically and responsibly
• Ethical Sourcing Policy compliance
• Minimum sustainability requirements
Community Engagement
We will help Kiwi families thrive
• Community partnerships
• Charitable giving and volunteering
We will empower team members to thrive
• Health, safety & wellbeing
• Employee Assistance Programme (EAP)
Wellbeing and BelongingCulture, Engagement and Inclusion
We will foster connection, inclusion & impact
• Leadership and culture
• Recognition programmes
ESG Data and Reporting
We will report openly and transparently
• ESG/Sustainability Reporting
• Climate-related disclosures
Responsible Retail Foundations
Communications and Marketing
We will leverage sustainability and community to improve team member and customer engagement
Vision: To make sustainable living easy and affordable for everyone
Four transformational Building Blocks and goals underpinned by key responsible retail foundations:
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 20269
IntroductionOur Approach
to Sustainability
Our People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
Product Sustainability Leadership
Value Chain Emissions
Aim
We will aim to progress meaningful Scope 3 emissions
reductions in high-impact and influenceable areas.
Progress
In FY26, we focused on building the data and supplier
capability needed to define credible Scope 3 priorities and
targets. See page 28 for further detail.
Product Sustainability Attributes
Aim
We will aim to increase the share of private label sales from
products with at least one approved sustainability attribute
to 100% by 2035.
Progress
In FY26, 36% of private-label sales across The Warehouse
and Warehouse Stationery came from products with one or
more approved sustainability features
1
, down from 40% in
FY25. This was influenced by significant renewal across our
product ranges during the year, particularly in apparel. This
represents 42,635 product lines and $350 million in sales.
We will aim to increase the use of approved sustainability
features across our ranges in the year ahead.
At year end, 70% of apparel and home textile sales featured
Better Cotton, recycled content or responsible certifications,
Play Studio toys using 100% recycled-content filling and
FSC®-certified wood, Market Kitchen coffee and cocoa
remained 100% Rainforest Alliance Certified, and Cruelty
Free International approved status was extended from Good
One to our new Poppi bath and shower range.
Packaging Sustainability
Aim
We will aim to phase out unnecessary or problematic
single-use plastics from our private label products and
ensure all product packaging meets our sustainability
requirements by 2035.
Progress
By the end of FY26, 66% of The Warehouse and Warehouse
Stationery private-label sales came from products with
packaging that met our sustainability requirements,
matching FY25’s performance. This year we moved to
measuring this metric by sales volume rather than sales
value, to avoid higher-priced lines skewing the result. As
we move closer to our goal, the remaining gap increasingly
sits in harder-to-switch formats, and this shift gives a more
representative view across our full range. The two years
aren’t directly comparable like-for-like.
We continued rolling out the Australasian Recycling Label
scheme, though this work remains at an early stage.
Supplier Engagement
Aim
We will aim to build carbon-management maturity across
our direct-sourcing factories.
Progress
Most of our GHG emissions sit in Scope 3, so supplier
engagement is critical. In FY26, we gained a clearer view of
carbon-management maturity across our direct-sourcing
factories and concluded that building capability, rather
than target adoption alone, should be our immediate focus.
Further detail, including our 2028 milestone and longer-
term maturity goal, is provided on page 28.
Sustainable Living Solutions
Reducing Customer Emissions
Aim
We will aim to help one million customers reduce their
GHG emissions in the home through a package of more
sustainable energy solutions by 2035.
Progress
Through our ongoing partnership with EECA - Energy
Efficiency & Conservation Authority, the Warmhouse
initiative aims to help New Zealand households stay
warm for less and use energy more efficiently. This year’s
winter campaign combined practical advice with a ‘Win a
Year’s Worth of Free Power’ giveaway and we introduced
a new Winter Saving Tips icon on our private-label heaters
directing customers to trusted guidance at the point of
purchase.
Product Efficiency
Aim
We will aim to improve the average energy and water
efficiency rating of our product portfolio by 50% by 2035
(compared to 2023).
Progress
We continued to drive energy efficiency improvements
across our private-label electronics range, with nearly half of
TV models sold during the year achieving energy star ratings
above EECA’s reported market average – including three
models reaching industry-leading 6- and 7-star ratings,
among them the best-selling VEON 50-inch 4K Smart TV.
Five of our seven Veon computer monitors also achieved
above-average energy star ratings.
Customer Reward
Aim
We will aim to incentivise and reward 1 million customers
for making more sustainable choices by 2035.
Progress
This year we deepened our understanding of what drives
customers to take part in circular and sustainable initiatives.
Through The Good Drop (see page 13) and promotional
giveaways with EECA, a clear insight has emerged: purpose,
both environmental and social, is the strongest motivator,
ahead of the reward itself. Our “thank you” offer plays a
supporting role, recognising customers and encouraging
them to come back. Over time, our aim is to turn one-off
actions into lasting habits that deliver impact at scale.
Circular Solutions for Customers
Post Consumer Solutions
Aim
We will aim to enable at least 80% of Kiwis to access
solutions to reuse or recycle a minimum of five difficult to
recycle items* by 2035.
*Problem Plastics; Electronics/Electricals; Textiles; Furniture &
Mattresses; & Food
Progress
We continued to strengthen practical pathways across our
priority waste streams – problem plastics, electronics and
textiles.
The Warehouse’s participation in the Soft Plastics Recycling
Scheme expanded to include Palmerston North and our
stores now span 54 collection points nationwide. Across 37
Noel Leeming and Warehouse Stationery stores, TechCollect
NZ collected 170 tonnes of e-waste, complemented by
nationwide take-back for phones (on behalf of RE:MOBILE)
and ink/toner cartridges (on behalf of Brother). FY26 was
also the first full year of The Good Drop, our clothing take-
1. An environmental or social attribute associated with a product that either meets a recognised third-party standard (e.g. Better Cotton or FSC) or has been internally assessed against defined requirements which address a
key social, ethical, or environmental issue in the product’s value chain.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202610
IntroductionOur Approach
to Sustainability
Our People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
back programme with The Salvation Army and ImpacTex,
expanding from five to 14 stores and donating over six
tonnes of apparel, with 94% diverted from landfill (see also
page 13). These initiatives collectively diverted more than
284 tonnes of material in FY26 (FY25: 283 tonnes).
Circular Innovation
Aim
We will aim to pilot at least one innovative proposition or
initiative each year which aims to help products last longer
or reduce waste (e.g. repair, rental, pre-fill).
Progress
In FY26, we tested practical circular models to extend
product life and reduce waste. The Good Drop helped us
understand customer behaviour and the requirements
for scaling apparel take-back, with 45% of participating
customers saying they felt “much more positive” about The
Warehouse afterwards. With TechCollect NZ, we trialled
an electronics repair and reuse pathway and the internal
logistics needed to support it. We also began preparing
for New Zealand’s emerging synthetic refrigerant product
stewardship scheme through Fleet Team training and de-
gassing equipment at our North Island Distribution Centre.
Sustainable Operations
Operational Emissions
Aim
We will aim to reduce Scope 1 and 2 emissions, aligned to a
1.5-degree Celsius trajectory, by 65% by 2030 compared to
a 2023 base year and on a pathway to net zero operational
emissions by 2040.
Progress
By January 2026, all sites where we control electricity supply
had transitioned to electricity matched with generation
from Lodestone Energy’s solar farms. This covers 186 sites, or
around 98% of our estate, excluding shared areas outside
our operational control. The only exceptions are four
landlord-supplied sites, where electricity is supplied by the
landlord, and ChocolateWorks, our joint venture chocolate
factory.
Scope 1 and market-based Scope 2 emissions are now 74.2%
below our 2023 base year up from 45% in FY25. This means
we have achieved our 2030 goal four years early. We will
review the target and our electricity accounting approach
as international standards evolve. Further detail is provided
on pages 27-30.
Operational Efficiency
Aim
We will aim to meaningfully improve the energy efficiency
of our buildings and domestic and international logistics
activities by 2030 (compared to 2023).
Progress
Work has continued on improving the efficiency of our
buildings and logistics. More detail is on pages 25, 28 and
30.
Reduced Waste
Aim
We will aim to demonstrably reduce total waste from our
activities in New Zealand and will divert at least 90% of
waste produced from landfill by 2035.
Progress
In FY26, we again diverted 79% of operational waste from
landfill, matching the FY25 result. Operational waste covers
logistics packaging, general waste from warehouses, stores
and offices, and waste arising from services provided to
customers. FY26 was a pivotal year, as we completed a
comprehensive review of our national waste and resource
recovery model to identify materials currently treated as
waste and lift diversion rates further in FY27 and beyond.
Group non-hazardous waste totalled 12,220 tonnes, an
increase of 2% from 11,952 tonnes in FY25. We recovered
8,566 tonnes of fibre, 548 tonnes of plastic (rigid plastic,
plastic film and expanded polystyrene), achieved a 79%
hanger reuse rate, and kept hazardous waste below one
tonne.
In April 2026, some sand products were recalled after
testing indicated possible asbestos. Returns have been
stored securely pending specialist disposal and are not
included in the waste figures above.
Through our KiwiHarvest partnership, more than 21
tonnes of surplus food and non-grocery products were
redistributed to communities in FY26 rather than disposed
of. We also began planning to extend the programme from
our North Island Distribution Centre into stores.
Operational wasteWaste
generated
(tonnes)
Waste diverted
from landfill
(tonnes)
Waste directed
to landfill
(tonnes)
General waste (includes
contaminated recycling,
general mixed commercial
and special burial)
2,6052,605
Paper, cardboard and
document destruction
8,5668,566
Mixed recycling, glass and
wood
122122
Metal (metal appliances and
e-waste)
358358
Plastic (rigid plastic,
plastic film and expanded
polystyrene)
548548
Food redistribution1111
Organic waste (includes
green and food waste)
99
Hazardous waste<1<1<1
Total operational waste12,2209,6152,605
FY26 operational waste
diverted and directed to
landfill
79%21%
NOTE: Waste data covers waste generated through the Group’s
operations, including waste from services such as our large appliance
collection and recycling service. It excludes product returns and post-
consumer waste from free take-back or recycling programmes open to
the public, regardless of where the product was purchased.
Responsible Retail Foundations
Our Responsible Retail Foundations set out core practices
that underpin how we operate as a business.
For more on our approach to people, see pages 15-16;
for engaging with communities, see pages 18-19; and for
ethical and responsible sourcing, see pages 20-23.
Further detail on our approach to governance can be
found on page 32.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202611
IntroductionOur Approach
to Sustainability
Our People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
Case Studies
Noel Leeming
Helping technology go further for longer
Technology has value long after the first sale. It runs
households, supports learning, powers work, grows
businesses and keeps whānau connected. For Noel
Leeming, the job is to help that value last.
For more than a decade, we’ve built services across the
full technology life-cycle: helping customers choose
efficient products, keeping products working through
repair, giving them a second life through trade-in and
refurbishment, and making recycling easy at the end.
Better choices, longer use, more recovery, less waste.
That’s circularity in action.
Designing circularity into the customer
experience
Some of our most important sustainability work happens
in the everyday. In FY26, our teams completed around
35,000 repairs and service interventions, keeping
products customers already own working harder for
longer.
Second-life pathways are growing fast. Since our trade-
in programme launched in April 2024, customers have
swapped eligible smartphones, laptops, tablets and
smartwatches for a gift card, with around 1,970 trade-ins
processed in FY26. In November 2025, we added quality
refurbished phones to the mix - an affordable way in for
customers and more life out of every device.
Making responsible recovery easier
Every product eventually reaches the end of the road, and
what happens next matters. Noel Leeming has run a large
appliance removal and recycling service for over a decade.
In FY26, Noel Leeming supported 11,026 households
to responsibly recycle old whiteware and appliances
through its long-standing removal and recycling service.
This was a 9.3% increase on FY25, reflecting growing
customer demand for convenient and responsible end-of-
life solutions.
That same service quietly handles the packaging too—
cardboard, plastic film and expanded polystyrene (EPS).
Each year, our stores return more than 67 tonnes of
EPS, 489 tonnes of cardboard and 4.2 tonnes of plastic
film through our own logistics network. Cardboard and
film are sent to established recycling pathways; EPS is
consolidated, cleaned, compressed and shipped to INTCO
Recycling in China, where it’s remade into products like
picture frames.
E-waste has become a growing focus since becoming a
TechCollect NZ drop-off point in 2023, customers have
recycled approximately 170 tonnes of e-waste through
our stores in FY26, safely recovering valuable materials
and hazardous components alike. We also run nationwide
take-back for mobile phones with RE:MOBILE and ink and
toner cartridges with Brother, recycling 500kg of phones
and 14 tonnes of cartridges in FY26.
Preparing for product stewardship
Product stewardship is reshaping appliance and
electronics recovery in Aotearoa New Zealand, and for
us, it’s nothing new. We’re not waiting to be told; our
work here is voluntary because we believe in it. For years
we’ve partnered with certified degassing agents to safely
destroy synthetic refrigerant gases from old appliances.
In 2026, we went further, qualifying four delivery team
members and a dedicated trainer as certified gas fillers,
joining the Cool-Safe recovery programme, and preparing
to bring degassing in-house at selected hubs.
We support product stewardship and a move to extended
product stewardship in New Zealand, and our e-waste
work reflects that. In March 2025, TechCollect NZ applied
for priority product stewardship accreditation, drawing
on real-world experience gained through three years
of operation across 29 Noel Leeming stores. In FY26,
Hastings, Gore and Porirua stores joined the scheme,
with support from local council funding, bringing the
TechCollect footprint to 32 Noel Leeming stores, alongside
five Warehouse Stationery stores. While the Ministry for
Cities, Environment, Regions and Transport (MCERT)
continues to consider the application, we’ve continued
to grow the programme and strengthen how we recover
e-waste. We’re also testing smarter recovery, trialling our
own delivery fleet to move e-waste at Wairau Park and
Manukau from November to January, and working with
a specialist refurbishment partner to assess how much
donated e-waste could be repaired rather than recycled.
Early signs are promising, with some higher-value assets
worth saving even when first written off.
Powered by people and looking ahead
Behind every repair, removal, trade-in and recycled
product are Noel Leeming people making circularity real
for customers, day in, day out. That everyday expertise is
one of our strongest sustainability assets.
The future of technology isn’t just about what’s next. It’s
about making what we already have go further, through
services, partnerships and capability that help customers
buy well, use longer, recover value, and recycle responsibly
at the end.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202612
IntroductionOur Approach
to Sustainability
Our People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
The Good Drop
Finding value in unwanted clothing
The Good Drop began as a five-store pilot in June 2025
to help customers donate unwanted clothing for reuse
or recycling. In FY26, we expanded the initiative to 14
stores from Whangārei to Timaru, and collected more
than six tonnes of clothing. By keeping more garments in
use, the initiative supports affordable access to clothing,
helps generate funding for community services through
charitable reuse partners, and reduces the volume of
textiles going to landfill. The initiative’s impact hasn’t
gone unnoticed either, with The Good Drop receiving
the KNAPP Sustainability Leadership Award at the 2026
Retail NZ Awards, acknowledging its role in providing a
practical, end-to-end circular solution for clothing, helping
extend garment life while delivering environmental and
community benefits.
Strong results, responsibly delivered
Results to date are strong. Research suggests only 20%
of clothing donations are considered re-sellable, but
in practice 52% of Good Drop donations have been
retained for resale, 42% through The Salvation Army
Family Stores and a further 10% through other charity or
reuse pathways. The initiative is intentionally designed to
support charitable reuse, not overwhelm the system. Any
Good Drop garments not suitable for resale are boxed up
and sent to ImpacTex for recycling, so 94% of donations
are kept out of landfill.
Whangārei in practice
Sustainability is about more than preserving and restoring
nature. It is also about helping whānau and communities
flourish. In Whangārei, The Warehouse store and local
Salvation Army Family Store show what this looks like in
practice. Since joining the pilot, the store has collected
more than 2.5 tonnes of unwanted clothing, with over half
suitable for reuse through Salvation Army pathways.
The local Family Store sits within a wider reuse ecosystem
that includes Intercept Fabric Rescue. Together, these
organisations direct garments to the pathway where
they can deliver the greatest social, environmental and
community value. Intercept gives materials new life
through repair, reuse and upcycling, while other local
partners provide accessible clothing support for people
experiencing financial hardship.
Turning donations into social value
Through resale, every two donated garments sold
through The Family Store generate approximately $13 in
revenue on average. After operating costs, around 20%
supports The Salvation Army’s social and community
programmes, including food support, housing assistance,
debt counselling, family support, children’s services and
addiction support. One unwanted garment can become
affordable clothing for one household, while helping fund
practical support for another.
This local ecosystem shows that second-hand retail
isn’t just a stop-over to landfill. It sorts, prices, repairs,
redistributes and recovers products that have already had
a first life, creating affordable access to essential goods,
supporting community services and reducing material
moving to landfill or lower-value recycling. The Good
Drop is a small part of a much larger movement: the
2026 Aotearoa New Zealand Reuse Impact Study found
charitable reuse organisations nationally enabled the
reuse of 46.9 million items and delivered an estimated
$844 million in cost-of-living relief last year alone.
What we’re learning about customers
The Good Drop is also giving us a better understanding
of how customers engage with circular initiatives, and
how we can thank them for taking part. Through The
Warehouse’s loyalty platform, the pilot has recorded
437 confirmed donations from 336 unique customers,
including 24 repeat donors, with 37% of customers
redeeming the thank-you offer they received.
Encouragingly, customers who took up the offer came
back to shop with us too, spending on average 90% more
per transaction than baseline apparel shoppers.
Looking ahead
While still early, The Good Drop shows how circular
initiatives can deliver for people, planet and profit,
supporting customers and communities, keeping more
clothing in use, and helping The Warehouse build insight
into commercially viable models for circular retail.
The Good Drop’s impact is best understood as a practical
example of shared value. Customers find it easier to act,
community partners capture more value from donated
goods, and more clothing stays in circulation for longer.
For The Warehouse, it shows how a value retailer can
make circular action more accessible while supporting
trusted community partners. As the initiative evolves, the
focus remains on increasing the proportion of clothing
that stays in reuse and strengthening the partnerships
that turn unwanted garments into lasting social and
environmental outcomes.
Click here to find out more
about The Good Drop
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202613
IntroductionOur Approach
to Sustainability
Our People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
Our People
Growing Our People
and Culture
Bringing our culture home
The past year has been about reconnecting our people
to our brands and purpose, while building strong
foundations for the next chapter of The Warehouse
Group.
Following a period of significant organisational change,
we focused on supporting leaders through change and
creating greater consistency in how our teams work, learn
and grow.
Across The Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery and Noel
Leeming, we invested in a stronger and more connected
team member experience. This included leadership
development, learning opportunities, new ways of
working, and programmes focused on recognition,
wellbeing and belonging.
This work is ongoing, but the foundations are now
in place. As a proudly New Zealand business, we are
building a culture that reflects who we are, our heritage,
and where we are heading together.
Growing leaders and capability
This year was about creating greater consistency,
discipline and support for leaders across our stores,
distribution centres and support offices.
We continued to invest in leadership development
through Lead 1, Lead 2, Emerge and Evolve, with a focus
on building capability across our store and frontline
leadership teams. Alongside these programmes, we
provided practical support for leaders navigating
organisational change, leading integrated teams
and building connection across remote and hybrid
environments.
We broadened access to development opportunities
for frontline team members, improving onboarding
experiences and ensuring compliance learning remained
a priority. We expanded cultural learning opportunities
and supported leaders through coaching, feedback, CEO
breakfast sessions and high-performing team workshops.
Looking ahead, our focus is on building deeper expertise
through craft-specific learning, succession planning and
future talent pathways that support career development
and help our people grow with The Warehouse Group.
Building a culture people want to
be part of
Over the past year, we continued to invest in team
engagement through recognition, wellbeing and
belonging programmes, helping our people feel more
connected, supported and valued.
Through Celebrate, High Five Awards, Quarterly Values
Awards, Trailblazer CEO Awards, service milestones
and our annual Impact Awards, we created more
opportunities to recognise great work and reinforce
the behaviours that matter most. Alongside this, we
continued creating moments of connection through
cultural celebrations, community initiatives, sporting
events, team activities and other small moments that
bring people together.
This year, we expanded our MyVoice engagement survey
across our stores, distribution centres and support offices,
giving us our clearest view yet of the team member
experience.
The results reflect an organisation undergoing significant
change and highlight areas where we can do better.
While there is more work to do, the survey provides
valuable insights to help us strengthen engagement and
better support our people.
FY26 People & Culture Snapshot
MeasureFY26
Learning Hours Delivered32,900
1
Leaders Participating in Lead, Emerge &
Evolve, Leading Integrated teams, CEO
Breakfast series
382
MyVoice Participation65%
eNPS25
2
Average team member tenure7 years
3
1. Covers structured learning delivered across the Group, including
eLearning and in-person sessions, but excluding on-the-floor
onboarding
2. Down from 36 in FY25, although the results are not directly
comparable as distribution centre team members were not surveyed
in FY25.
3. Average (mean) length of service for permanent New Zealand-based
team members as at year-end (headcount 7,539).
Employee Turnover
FY2632.2%
FY2518.1%
FY2423.7%
FY2326.9%
FY2228.4%
NOTE: The employee turnover rate relates to voluntary departures only
and excludes redundancies and other employer-initiated leavers. The
increase in FY26 reflects changes in voluntary departures and a lower
average headcount, partly reflecting organisational changes associated
with the transfer of some services to TCS during the year.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202615
Our People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
Introduction
Supporting Our People
to Thrive
Wellbeing, inclusion and
belonging
Supporting our people to thrive remains central to our
culture.
Our wellbeing approach continues to focus on four key
pillars: physical, mental, financial and social wellbeing.
Throughout the year, we delivered initiatives that
supported team members through different life stages
while increasing awareness of the wellbeing resources
available to them.
We continued to support our people through important
life stages, including our 26-week paid parental leave. In
FY26, 83 team members made use of the policy.
Through The Warehouse Group Foundation, we also
provide a Team Member Emergency Assistance Fund for
those facing unforeseen personal hardship or the impacts
of a natural disaster. In FY26, four team members received
grants from this fund.
We strengthened our focus on diversity, equity, inclusion
and belonging. This included ongoing work to improve
gender equity, celebrate the diverse cultures represented
across our workforce and create an environment where
people feel respected, valued and included.
We remain committed to building a diverse and inclusive
workforce that reflects the communities we serve. In FY26,
37.5% of our senior leaders were women (FY25: 45.2%),
against our target of 50%. Our Group-wide median
gender pay gap was 0% (FY25: 0%), though differences
remain within some parts of our business. Additional
workforce diversity data is provided in the Corporate
Governance section of our FY26 Annual Report. In FY27,
we intend to review our diversity and inclusion objectives,
along with the initiatives needed to support their
achievement.
Our commitment to Te Ao Māori remains an important
part of this journey, helping us strengthen our connection
to Aotearoa New Zealand while ensuring our culture
reflects the communities and customers we serve.
This includes activities for our teams to celebrate and
participate in Te Wiki o te Reo Māori and Matariki.
Health and safety
As an ACC-Accredited Employer, we continue to maintain
effective health and safety systems across the Group. In
line with the commitment set out in last year’s report, we
delivered targeted measures in FY26 to address the injury
trends identified in FY25.
Although we recognise there is more work to do, we saw
an improvement in our injury indicators in FY26. Total
Recordable Injuries (TRI) decreased 12.2% to 330, from 376
in FY25, while the Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate
(TRIFR) decreased to 28.3 per million hours worked, from
30.2 in FY25. Lost Time Injuries (LTI) decreased 16.6% to
196, from 235 in FY25, and the Lost Time Injury Frequency
Rate (LTIFR) decreased to 16.8 per million hours worked,
from 18.9 in FY25. Musculoskeletal injuries continued to
account for the majority of our injuries and will be the
focus of a targeted improvement initiative in FY27.
Recorded critical risk events decreased to two in FY26,
from eight in FY25. We continued the reset of our critical
risk programme and aligned our assurance processes
to support it. This included establishing risk profiles
to support a right-fit health, safety and wellbeing
framework across our organisation, developing key
critical risk standards and completing initial testing to
assess whether our critical controls were in place and
effective. Findings from this testing will inform our FY27
improvement priorities and the continued development
of our supporting systems.
Violent and aggressive behaviour towards our store teams
remains a significant challenge for the New Zealand retail
sector. In FY26, recorded events decreased 15% to 193,
from 227 in FY25. We continue to focus on strengthening
the systems and controls that support our teams and
manage this risk, including exploring technology-based
solutions to improve monitoring and early identification
of concerning behaviour in our stores.
There have been zero workplace fatalities for the ninth
year in a row.
28.3 per
million hours
Total Recordable Injury
Frequency Rate (TRIFR)
(FY25: 30.2)
16.8 per
million hours
Lost Time Injury
Frequency Rate (LTIFR)
(FY25: 18.9)
2 critical
risk events
(FY25: 8)
Looking ahead
In FY27, our focus is to build on the progress made over
the past year.
We will focus on leadership capability, succession
planning and talent pathways, while reviewing our
diversity, equity, inclusion and belonging objectives and
the initiatives needed to support them.
We will continue developing our health and safety
programme, with a focus on reducing musculoskeletal
injuries, strengthening critical risk management and
improving the systems and controls that help keep our
teams safe.
By investing in our people, we are creating a stronger
organisation and a workplace where people can grow,
contribute and thrive.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202616
Our People
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our
Relationships
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
Introduction
Our Relationships
Our Communities
Across our three brands, we’re within a 20-minute drive
of 85% of Kiwis, wherever they live. That reach comes
with a responsibility, not just to provide the products
and services our customers need, but also to back the
communities they call home, in the way we always have.
This year, alongside our wider strategy work, we took a
closer look at how we show up for communities, thinking
harder about the causes that matter most to New
Zealanders and to us, and the partners best placed to help
us make a genuine difference rather than just a gesture.
That thinking builds on the strategy we refined in FY25,
and continues to focus on the essentials, from period
products and youth development to festive support at
Christmas.
We continued to partner with The Kindness Collective, The
Salvation Army, Variety – the Children’s Charity, Youthline
and Women’s Refuge, working with each to find new
ways to reach the people who need it most, through both
national campaigns and local, store-level initiatives.
This year, we deepened our partnerships with KiwiHarvest,
redistributing surplus food and products to communities
in need, and with EECA, helping families find more
affordable ways to stay warm this winter.
We support two national campaigns each year, Be the
Joy at Christmas and Kindness Collective’s PJ Project
in winter, alongside local fundraising our stores run
throughout the year for the causes that matter most in
their communities.
Our team members can give directly through payroll
giving, donating straight from their wages to the causes
they care about, with $54,884 contributed this way in
FY26.
Every team member can take a paid day each year to
volunteer in their community. In FY26, 185 volunteering
hours were recorded, although we know this understates
team member participation because not all activity was
captured centrally. Our teams volunteered in activities
ranging from packing food parcels to helping families
at The Kindness Collective’s Joy Store, reflecting our
value of Doing Good. Improving how we capture data on
volunteering activity will be a focus in FY27.
We expect our community work to evolve further in FY27,
focusing on the causes and partnerships where we feel we
can make the greatest impact.
Thanks to the generosity of our customers and our teams,
$1.9 million was contributed to New Zealand charities and
local community groups in FY26.
The power of the Red Bag
Our iconic $1 Red Bag is more than just a recycled,
reusable shopping bag. Every time a customer purchases
one, the proceeds help us give back to Kiwi communities
in a meaningful way. A portion of every Red Bag sold
supports our national community partners, while another
portion stays with the local store team, empowering them
to respond to the unique needs of their communities. This
year, Red Bag sales generated $1.35 million in support for
causes across Aotearoa New Zealand.
Be the Joy: bringing joy to families
at Christmas
Our team and customers came together in an
extraordinary show of generosity for Be the Joy in FY26,
our annual Christmas fundraising campaign. Running
from 19 November to 24 December, customers could add
$2 or more at the checkout in-store or online, or donate
new toys and gifts for Women’s Refuge at dedicated
in-store collection points. Across our retail brands, we
raised $262,067 for four partners: The Kindness Collective,
The Salvation Army, Variety – the Children’s Charity,
and Women’s Refuge. Together, we helped bring joy to
thousands of families across the country with gifts, toys,
and food for Christmas.
PJ Project: keeping Kiwi kids warm
over winter
This winter, our team and customers supported Kindness
Collective’s PJ Project, their campaign to keep children
and families warm during the coldest months of the year.
Alongside in-store donations, we sold exclusive Kindness
Collective pyjamas at $10 a pair, with $1 from every sale
going straight to the project. We supported their National
PJ Day, with many of our stores and head office team
members wearing their PJs for the day and donating a
gold coin to the cause. Thanks to their generosity, we
raised $148,982, and 34,484 pairs of PJs were donated to
families across Aotearoa New Zealand.
Products that give back
Some of the everyday products our customers buy also
give back. Our iconic $1 Red Bag leads the way, but it’s far
from being the only product that gives back.
We help make period products more accessible through
our range of private label $2 pads, with one in every ten
sold being donated to local organisations in need through
our partnership with The Kindness Collective. We donated
66,224 units in FY26, bringing the total donated since the
programme began to 534,540 units. We also provide free
period products for our team members.
Also, our exclusive Kindness Collective pyjama range saw
$1 from every pair donated to the PJ Project to help keep
Kiwi kids warm.
$1.9m
contributed to charities
and community groups
in FY26
contributed to charities
and community groups
since our doors opened
in 1982
$90m
More than
$262,067
raised to help
Kiwi families for
Christmas 2025
$148,982
raised to help
keep kids warm
this winter
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202618
Our
Relationships
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur People
Supporting youth pathways
With youth unemployment in New Zealand at its highest in decades, helping rangatahi
into work matters more than ever, and as one of the country’s largest retail employers,
we believe we have a role to play.
Red Shirts in Schools
Our long-running Gateway programme, Red Shirts in Schools, gives Year 11 to 13 students
hands-on retail experience, helping them build confidence, develop workplace skills
and earn NCEA credits. This year we relaunched the programme with a new delivery
partner, GRIP, bringing a more consistent, nationally supported model and reducing the
coordination load on our stores. We also introduced a new Level 3 pathway, RISE (Retail
Industry Skills Experience), alongside the existing Level 2, giving students a clearer route
from school towards employment.
In FY26, 361 students took part across 33 stores and 40 schools. Since the programme
began in the mid 2000s, it has supported more than 7,700 students, including team
members across the business who started their careers this way.
Aspire with The Salvation Army
We continue to support Aspire, a programme created in partnership with The Salvation
Army, which celebrated its tenth year in FY26. Aspire helps young people build
confidence, resilience and essential life skills through weekly group sessions, outdoor
adventures and community projects, all led by experienced youth workers. The impact
shows up in real change: early results this year found a 22% increase in young people
feeling comfortable engaging with adults, and a 33% increase in those feeling able to
talk to others about their problems.
Aspire runs on a calendar-year basis, and across the school years spanning FY26 some 381
rangatahi took part, with more to come during the rest of the 2026 calendar year. Since it
began, the programme has supported over 3,500 young people.
Variety – the Children’s Charity
For more than 20 years, we have proudly supported Variety – the Children’s Charity,
helping improve the health, education and wellbeing of children experiencing material
deprivation.
In FY26, our support helped 371 children through Variety’s Individual Grant programme,
having a positive impact on an estimated 1,744 lives across Aotearoa New Zealand. This
funded 91 education grants for needs including digital devices, school uniforms and
stationery, 166 wellbeing grants to help children take part in extracurricular activities,
and 114 health grants covering essentials such as medical costs, mobility support and
bedding. Our teams also raised $75,128 for Variety through Noel Leeming’s Friends
and Family event and annual Gala Awards night, and we directly sponsor 100 children
through the Kiwi Kid Sponsorship programme.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202619
Our
Relationships
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur People
Trading Ethically and
Responsibly
Our ethical sourcing programme has been in place for
more than 20 years, and the principle behind it hasn’t
changed: we have a duty to make sure the basic human
and labour rights of the workers in our supply chain are
respected, and that the products we sell are made in
safe, fair and environmentally responsible conditions. In
a global sourcing environment that remains fast-moving
and fiercely competitive, that work matters as much now
as it ever has.
Our Ethical Sourcing Policy sets the framework. It
applies to all suppliers, with our focus on the private
label, exclusive and licensed products we source for The
Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery — around 49%
of sales for these retail brands in FY26. It draws clear
Zero Tolerance lines on issues like child or forced labour,
bribery and unauthorised production, treats transparency
as non-negotiable, and sets baseline expectations on
environmental responsibility and compliance with local
laws.
The programme has continued to mature over the past
decade moving from factory-level compliance towards
responsible sourcing across the whole value chain —
engaging lower-tier suppliers in priority categories
and tightening our approach to raw materials such as
timber, palm oil, cocoa and cotton, where social and
environmental risks are most closely linked. We back
this with training, supported improvement plans and
a Supplier Scorecard rating ethical and environmental
performance. This year we went further on climate,
making completion of the ERSA Verified Carbon
Self-Assessment Questionnaire (SAQ) a qualification
requirement for factories with significant spend (see
page 28), and our Supply Chain Finance programme
with HSBC evolved into a Sustainable Supply Chain
Finance mechanism, linking a supplier’s sustainability
performance to the finance rates available to them (see
page 23).
We also made written and oral submissions to the
Education and Workforce Committee on the Modern
Slavery Bill, supporting the Bill while calling for alignment
with Australia and other international regimes and for
offshore selling platforms to be brought into scope.
Assessment and monitoring
We qualify every production site before any orders
are placed and monitor on a risk basis from there.
Our assessments use the LRQA Elevate Responsible
Sourcing Assessment (ERSA) 3.0 tool, which looks across
labour, health and safety, business ethics and basic
environmental practices, with sites graded A to D; a
site must reach at least a C to qualify, though in certain
cases a D may be given temporary approval where a
focused remediation plan is in place. Assessments are
carried out by approved partners, with validated self-
assessments or recent third-party audits accepted where
appropriate, and sites are reassessed every one to three
years depending on risk. Most assessments are semi-
announced, but we will visit unannounced where we have
cause for concern, and our local teams run witnessed
and shadow audits and random spot checks to test
consistency and catch risks like unauthorised production
or subcontracting.
While our focus is first-tier production sites, since FY22
we’ve traced and assessed second-tier sites in textiles,
wood and paper. Where an assessment identifies a critical
issue, the supplier must put a time-bound Corrective
Action Plan (CAP) in place, overseen by our local teams,
and persistent non-disclosure can end a relationship.
Our Zero Tolerances cover the most serious breaches
— denying us access to a site or records, unauthorised
production, child or forced labour, harassment or abuse of
workers, bribery or corruption, and serious environmental
harm such as the dumping of hazardous waste. When
any of these come to light, we act straight away, whether
that’s by enforcing a financial penalty, halting production,
or ultimately ending the contract.
We use LRQA’s EiQ platform to benchmark social and
environmental risk in real time and track assessment
status, and continue to draw on its Sentinel feature, which
scans global media and online sources to flag emerging
environmental, social and governance (ESG) or labour-
related concerns linked to our supply chain as they arise.
Source country profile
China remained our largest sourcing base in FY26,
accounting for 65% of private-label and licensed
product spend, followed by New Zealand at 19%
and Bangladesh at 7%. Together, these three
markets represented more than 91% of spend.
India, Vietnam and Indonesia accounted for a
further 5%, with the remaining 4% spread across a
long tail of lower-volume markets in Asia, Europe
and elsewhere. While China remains our primary
sourcing market, New Zealand-made products
continue to play an important role, particularly
across grocery and garden. Since 2018, we have
published on our website a list of the Tier 1 sites
used to manufacture our private-label products,
together with Tier 2 sites in the textiles, wood
and paper supply chains above a defined spend
threshold.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202620
Our
Relationships
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur People
FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme
307,500+
837
active Tier 1 factories
workers in active Tier 1 factories
Audit
and due
diligence
Worker
voice
Zero
tolerance
findings
8
Remediation
and supplier
development
183
Newly qualified
factories
1
2,614
Worker
interviewees
9
8
Unauthorised
production
2
Bribery
notification
1
Access denied
1
Withholding
of wages
1
CAP refusal
1
Threatened
worker retaliation
492
Tier 1 factory
assessments
2
48
Tier 1 factories
declined or
discontinued
59%
Average onsite
audit score
94%
Audit
transparency
3
96%
Production
traceability
4
34
Tier 2 factories
registered, trained
and assessed
473
Corrective Action
Plans (CAPs)
actively managed
5
317
Corrective Action
Plans (CAPs)
completed
2,044
e-learning lessons
completed
6
207
Supplier training
sessions
7
7
factories enrolled in our Beyond
Social Compliance Programme
1. Includes ERSA audits, ERSA Self-Assessment Questionnaires (SAQs), and qualifying audit reports converted into an ERSA equivalent score (EQs)
2. Includes ERSA audits, ERSA SAQs, and EQs
3. % validated verbal and documented audit disclosures
4. Traceability of orders to qualified factories
5. Factories under post-audit monitoring and support and includes CAPs carried over from FY25
6. Modules include audit preparation, working hours control, wages and benefits, health and safety, transparency and ethics, corrective action planning, vendor responsibility, climate and water management, and prevention
of modern slavery (forced and child labour)
7. Number of onsite or virtual training sessions delivered to vendors or factories to assist them to prepare for assessments or execute any Corrective Action Plans
8. Discovered via independent auditors or local team assessments, and may be subject to financial penalties and / or business termination
9. Privately interviewed by our team members or independent auditors.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202621
Our
Relationships
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur People
Audit performance and findings
The charts below summarise the results of our FY26 assessments for Tier 1 production sites. The first shows the distribution of audit ratings across all factories. The second highlights
the prevalence of non-compliances by topic.
FY26 audit finding prevalence by topic
Labour
Health and Safety
Management Systems
Environment
Business Ethics
Note: 2,141 findings identified across 233 ERSA audits carried out in FY26. Labour (e.g. issues associated with
hours of work and wages and benefits) and health and safety findings represented over 94% of findings.
Business ethics includes transparency issues such as site access denied or inconsistent records.
FY26 audit rating distribution
A - Top performer – no findings or
very few minor/moderate ones.
B - Ceiling for factories with major
issues – if there is a major issue,
factory will be rated at B at best.
C - Bottom line for factories without
critical issues. If there is no critical
issue, factory will be rated at C at
worst.
D - Poor performance – critical or
Zero Tolerance violations identified.
Note: Audit rating distribution from 233 ERSA onsite audits carried out in FY26. Audits are scored 0-100 and
graded as follows A (100-91), B (90-71), C (70-51) and D (50-0).
In FY26 we qualified 183 new factories, while 48 factories were declined or discontinued for failing to meet our required standards. We applied our Zero Tolerance escalation
process wherever serious concerns were identified, recording 14 escalations during the year. These comprised eight cases of unauthorised production, two bribery notifications, one
instance of access being denied, one wage withholding concern (flagged through routine monitoring, where a verified enhanced compensation payment was followed by a repeat
breach, leading to discontinuation), one refusal to complete a Corrective Action Plan, and one threat of retaliation against workers; the bribery and retaliation cases have also been
discontinued. Each case was managed through our escalation and remediation process, which can result in penalties, halted production or, ultimately, ending the relationship.
Tier 2 sites used for textiles, wood and paper products were assessed separately by our local team on a pass/fail basis.
During FY26, Sentinel flagged two factory fire incidents, one in Bangladesh and one in Pakistan, that had not been reported to us directly. Our local teams followed up with the
suppliers concerned, and neither incident affected orders.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202622
Our
Relationships
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur People
Deeper due diligence – Tier 2 transparency
Our Tier 2 programme, begun in FY22, focuses on textiles, wood and paper, categories
where labour and environmental risks like water use and chemical discharge often sit
deeper in the supply chain. In FY26, valid assessments covered 38% of spend across
these products.
Looking ahead, we will sharpen our country and category risk lens so effort follows the
highest risks, refresh assessments as they fall due, and make greater use of Sentinel
monitoring to track modern slavery and other ESG risks in real time, building a Tier 2
programme that is increasingly proactive, data-driven and scalable.
Supplier engagement and development
Because audits on their own don’t create lasting change, we invest in capability
alongside them, through e-learning, training and supported improvement plans
covering both labour rights and basic environmental practices.
Beyond Social Compliance Programme
In FY25 we piloted our Beyond Social Compliance Programme, now a key part of how
we support factories that matter to us but fall short of our standards, where there is a
genuine willingness to improve. Working alongside factory management and specialist
local partners, the pilot has supported seven factories across China and India, tackling
issues from excessive working hours and wage compliance to fire safety, chemical
handling and, in one case, a critical wastewater problem resolved by connecting
untreated discharge to the site’s treatment plant. Results have been encouraging, with
one factory lifting its compliance score by more than 60% and resolving its most serious
finding. A key learning is that lasting change takes more than fixing individual issues.
One factory began strongly, but a change in leadership midway through set progress
back. This highlighted that sustained improvement depends on stable management
and embedded capability, not one-off remediation.
Supplier Scorecard and Sustainable Supply Chain Finance
Every active direct-sourcing supplier providing products in FY26 had a Supplier
Scorecard. Rather than looking at audit results alone, the Scorecard combines three
sustainability measures (ethical sourcing, packaging sustainability and product
sustainability) alongside wider commercial and operational performance, giving a single
view of each supplier and an overall Red, Amber or Green rating. Of the 408 suppliers
rated in FY26, 15% were Green, 69% Amber and 16% Red.
We plan to add a carbon management maturity metric to the Scorecard in FY27,
embedding a supplier’s climate capability progress directly into its overall rating (see
page 28 for more detail).
The Scorecard also underpins our Sustainable Supply Chain Finance (SSCF) programme
with HSBC, New Zealand’s first facility of its kind, which evolved from our long-standing
supply chain finance arrangement in FY26. Around 80% of direct-sourcing suppliers are
enrolled in the programme, which rewards stronger sustainability performance through
the finance rates available from HSBC. During the year our SSCF programme was
named joint regional winner of the Best ESG Supply Chain Solution at The Asset Triple A
Treasurise Awards 2026, and was a finalist in the INFINZ Awards (Innovation in Financial
Services) and the Retail NZ Awards (Sustainability Leadership).
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202623
Our
Relationships
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur People
Our Climate Transition
and Emissions
Our Climate Transition
and Emissions
We have measured, reported and independently assured
our GHG emissions since around 2006. Following
proposed changes to the Group’s reporting obligations,
from FY26 we are providing streamlined climate-related
reporting as part of our broader sustainability reporting.
This focuses on progress against our Climate Transition
Plan and our annual GHG emissions inventory. Our
approach continues to be informed by the climate-
related scenario analysis, risks and opportunities
developed through our earlier disclosures, which remain
broadly unchanged and continue to shape our transition
planning.
A key development this year is that our climate-related
key risk indicators, previously under development, have
progressed and been incorporated into the Group’s
enterprise risk management framework. Further detail on
how we monitor these risks is provided on page 32.
Transition Planning
Guided by our Sustainable Living Plan, our Climate
Transition Plan sets out how we intend to move towards
becoming a lower-carbon, more climate-resilient business
that supports a just transition. As a founding signatory of
the Climate Leaders Coalition, we support the goals of the
Paris Agreement and are committed to contributing to
New Zealand’s target of net zero GHG emissions by 2050.
Developed in FY25, the plan focuses on four priority levers:
• Products and customers: expanding lower-impact
ranges and services that help customers reduce in-
use emissions and household energy costs.
• Supply chain: improving supplier data quality
and carbon-management maturity to support
future embodied-emissions reductions in priority
categories.
• Operations: improving energy performance of stores
and distribution centres, optimising logistics and
reducing waste.
• Ways of working: embedding climate
considerations in day-to-day decisions through
stronger governance, clearer accountabilities and
better data.
The overview on the next page maps these levers
across our Sustainable Living Plan Building Blocks
and supporting enablers, showing the foundations
established through FY25, our priorities through to FY28
and potential future steps.
This year we continued to progress actions across
these levers. We expanded the use of independently
Verified Carbon SAQ assessments across our direct-
sourcing factories, with completion now a qualification
requirement for factories with significant spend. We also
launched Sustainable Supply Chain Finance with HSBC,
progressed LED lighting and HVAC upgrades in parts of
our estate, completed a review of our national waste and
resource-recovery model, moved to a new GHG emissions
inventory solution and incorporated climate-related risks
into the Group’s enterprise risk management framework.
In FY27, we will continue reviewing the transition plan
and its targets to ensure they remain aligned with
our business strategy, priorities and evolving climate
standards. Delivering the plan depends on addressing
several foundational challenges, including gaps in Scope
3 data and capability, potential misalignment in policy
and regulation, and constraints around cost, capital
and technology. We also recognise the inherent tension
between our drive to return to profitability and growth,
and the need to reduce our environmental footprint.
Regulation, insurance costs, consumer sentiment and
supply chain resilience remain key uncertainties that we
continue to monitor so our plan can adapt as conditions
change.
We have not identified any specific amounts of capital
expenditure, financing or investment deployed towards
climate-related risks and opportunities in FY26. In
FY24, we amended our project reporting to include a
dedicated field for identifiable projects with climate
and sustainability considerations applicable to all
investment requests regardless of value. For example, in
FY26 the Group invested approximately $1.75 million in
store upgrades, including LED retail lighting and HVAC
replacement.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202625
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Key Goals
An overview of our Climate Transition Plan
The following overview shows the foundations established through FY25, our priorities through to FY28 and potential future steps. The plan will continue to evolve in response to
science, regulation, stakeholder feedback, business needs and our commercial and financial realities. This may include updating our goals, capabilities and actions as the challenges,
assumptions and dependencies underpinning the plan change.
Towards becoming a lower carbon, more climate-resilient, and just retail business
Sustainable Living Plan
Building Block and Foundations
FY23-25
Foundations established
FY26-28
Our priorities
FY29+
Potential future steps
Product Sustainability Leadership Established product and packaging sustainability
requirements, introduced the Supplier Sustainability
Scorecard and began verified carbon-management
assessments with our direct-sourcing factories.
Build carbon-management maturity across our direct-
sourcing factories (p. 28), while continuing to improve
product and packaging sustainability within commercial
guardrails (p. 10) and recognising stronger supplier
performance through Sustainable Supply Chain Finance
(p. 23).
Further supplier collaboration and innovation to
reduce product and packaging impacts.
Sustainable Living Solutions Established customer partnerships and trials focused
on household energy efficiency, more efficient products
and incentives for more sustainable choices.
Strengthen partnerships, product improvements and
customer incentives that help households reduce energy
use, emissions and costs (p. 10).
Scale commercially viable solutions in
collaboration with suppliers, partners and
customers.
Circular Solutions for Customers Expanded customer access to recycling for soft plastics,
electronics and other difficult-to-recycle products, and
piloted clothing take-back and reuse.
Expand viable reuse, repair and recycling solutions that
help products and materials remain in use for longer (p.
10; case studies, pp. 12–13).
Scale circular services and partnerships that keep
products and materials in use for longer.
Running a More Sustainable Operation Established our renewable electricity partnership with
Lodestone Energy, shifted our passenger fleet towards
lower-emissions vehicles and maintained operational
waste diversion above 70%.
Having achieved our 2030 operational emissions
reduction target early, continue improving the emissions
and resource efficiency of our stores, distribution centres
and logistics (pp. 25 and 28–30), while progressing waste
reduction and landfill diversion (p. 11).
Future actions guided by new insights, public
policy, and innovation as we continue our pathway
to zero emissions across our owned New Zealand
operations by 2040.
Responsible Retail Foundations Embedded climate expectations within our Ethical
Sourcing Policy and began strengthening customer and
team engagement on sustainability.
Strengthen climate awareness and capability across
our teams and suppliers, including through supplier
qualification, development and performance processes.
See pages 20–23 and 28.
Future actions may include assessing supply chain
climate vulnerability and expecting strategic
suppliers to have adaptation plans in place.
Supporting Activity and Enablers
Governance and AccountabilityStrengthened Board and executive oversight of climate-
related matters and began aligning climate-related risks
with the Group’s enterprise risks.
Embed climate-related risks within enterprise risk
management (p. 32) and clarify accountability for
transition priorities, targets and reporting.
Continue embedding climate considerations across
the business through Board oversight, enterprise
risk management and periodic strategy reviews.
Data, Systems and InsightsIdentified material emissions-data gaps and began
improving the collection and management of Scope 1,
Scope 2 and selected Scope 3 information.
Improve emissions data, systems (pp. 27–30) and supplier
capability (p. 28) to support credible Scope 3 priorities,
targets and reporting.
Improve alignment with financial reporting and
progressively integrate emissions data across our
financial, procurement and supplier systems.
Policy and Financial AlignmentReflected climate targets in our wider sustainability
strategy and introduced climate and sustainability
considerations into capital-investment requests.
Continue to consider climate and sustainability in
relevant investment, financing, procurement and
operational decisions (p. 25).
Continue integrating climate into procurement,
investment, and capital planning processes.
FY23 Base year
Operational emissions baseline
2028
Milestone
2030
Target
2040
Aspiration
Supplier carbon maturity
Majority of direct-sourcing
factory spend moving beyond
foundational carbon management
practices
✔ 65% emissions
reduction
Scope 1 and market-based
Scope 2 emissions
Net Zero emissions
across our New Zealand
operations
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202626
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Metrics and Targets
GHG emissions inventory
Emissions categories
The Group currently assesses operational impact on the
climate by measuring our absolute Scope 1 and 2 and
certain Scope 3 emissions against an FY23 base year. A
full list of legal entities included and excluded within our
organisational boundary is provided in Appendix 1.
Scope 1 includes GHG emissions from sources that we
own or control. This includes the fuel used in vehicles we
own or lease, natural gas, emissions generated through
the use of refrigerants, and diesel consumption from
the operation of our facilities. Our Scope 2 emissions
include indirect GHG emissions from the generation of
electricity that we purchase. These Scope 2 emissions
are different depending on whether they are calculated
using a Location-based or a market-based methodology,
and we disclose both in this report. Scope 3 includes
GHG emissions generated by our own suppliers and
customers. The most significant Scope 3 GHG emissions
which contribute to our overall carbon footprint include:
• GHG Protocol Category 1: Emissions from purchased
goods and services, primarily the production of the
products that we source (not currently measured);
• GHG Protocol Categories 4 and 9: Emissions
generated from upstream and downstream logistics/
freight (measured with some exclusions);
• GHG Protocol Category 11: Emissions associated
with the use of our products; including the electricity
used to power or wash our products (not currently
measured); and
• GHG Protocol Category 12: Emissions associated
with the disposal of our products (not currently
measured).
Methodology for measuring GHG
emissions
In measuring GHG emissions, we employ an operational
control approach for The Warehouse Limited, Warehouse
Stationery, Noel Leeming, ChocolateWorks NZ Ltd, our
New Zealand Store Support Office, and our international
sourcing hubs (China, India, and Bangladesh). Current
reported GHG emissions sources adhere to the
measurement requirements of the GHG Protocol’s
Corporate Standard, the Scope 2 Guidance, and the
Corporate Value Chain (Scope 3) Standard. During FY26,
we moved to a new GHG emissions inventory solution to
improve the collection, calculation and management of
our emissions data.
Concerning Scope 3 emissions, as of the date of this
report, we measure and report on a selected subset of
these emissions. These GHG Protocol Scope 3 categories
are:
• Category 3: Fuel and Energy-Related Activities
• Category 4: Upstream Transportation and
Distribution
• Category 5: Waste Generated in Operations
• Category 6: Business Travel
• Category 9: Downstream Transportation and
Distribution
Appendix 1 of this report outlines:
• The standards, methodologies, assumptions and
calculation methods used to prepare the inventory
• Source of emission factors and the global warming
potential (GWP) rates applied
• Emissions data for the six Kyoto Protocol greenhouse
gases, separately for Scope 1 and Scope 2 (location-
based) emissions
• Exclusions from the inventory, including their
rationale and current status
Categories 13, 14 and 15 are not currently applicable for
the Group. We will continue improving the data and
methodologies for significant unmeasured categories,
particularly purchased goods and services and the use of
sold products, so they can better inform future Scope 3
priorities and targets.
Our approach to recalculating base year emissions,
including the threshold that would trigger a restatement,
is available on our website.
Emissions reduction targets
Scope 1 and 2 targets
Our target is to reduce absolute Scope 1 and market-
based Scope 2 emissions, aligned to a 1.5-degree Celsius
trajectory, by 65% by 2030 compared to a 2023 base
year, with a pathway to net zero operational emissions
by 2040. This target was developed using the Science
Based Targets initiative (SBTi) target-setting tool. While
we believe it is aligned with SBTi’s requirements, it has not
been validated by them.
This target does not rely on the use of voluntary offsets,
but in the context of Scope 2 emissions it does rely on our
partnership with renewable energy generator Lodestone
Energy. All electricity that Lodestone Energy generates
under its arrangements with the Group is certified 100%
renewable and has zero emissions through the New
Zealand Energy Certificate (NZEC) System maintained by
BraveTrace. This energy is matched and verified against
electricity purchased by the Group. A total of 67,684 NZEC
certificates, the equivalent of 67,684 megawatt-hours
(MWh) of electricity, were redeemed against the Group
over FY26 from solar generation at the Edgecumbe,
Kaitaia and Waiotahe Lodestone Energy solar farms,
representing 90% of our total electricity for the reporting
period.
Our long-term partnership with Lodestone Energy
also supports additional renewable generation in New
Zealand, contributing towards New Zealand’s aspirational
goal to achieve 100% renewable electricity generation by
2030.
International standards governing corporate emissions
targets and Scope 2 accounting are evolving. The SBTi
published its Corporate Net-Zero Standard V2.0 in June
2026. The GHG Protocol is separately revising its Scope
2 Guidance, with proposed changes including more
granular time and geographic matching requirements for
market-based electricity claims. As these requirements
are finalised and implemented, we will review our Scope 1
and 2 target, our market-based Scope 2 methodology and
the continued treatment of electricity supplied through
our Lodestone Energy partnership.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202627
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Scope 3 priorities and supplier
engagement
Footprinting work carried out in FY24 estimated that
Scope 3 represents more than 90% of our overall
emissions footprint, with purchased goods and services
under Category 1 accounting for around 70% of Scope
3. These estimated emissions are not included in our
reported and assured GHG inventory due to underlying
data-quality and completeness limitations, but they
reinforce why supplier engagement, particularly at factory
level, is central to our Scope 3 approach.
We had intended to define our Scope 3 priorities more
precisely in FY26. Doing this credibly depends not only
on understanding where emissions sit, but also on
whether suppliers can measure and reduce them. This
is why supplier capability has become our immediate
focus. Since February 2025, we have used the ERSA
Verified Carbon SAQ tool to assess factories across carbon
accounting, energy and emissions-reduction activity,
target-setting and governance, with results independently
verified and graded from A, strong maturity, to D, low
maturity. In FY26, direct-sourcing private-label factories
representing 55% of spend had completed an assessment.
Completion is now a qualification requirement for
factories with significant spend.
In FY27, we plan to incorporate carbon-management
maturity into our Supplier Scorecard, which underpins
the sustainability ratings used in our Sustainable Supply
Chain Finance programme with HSBC. This reflects our
move beyond a supplier-engagement goal focused
primarily on science-based target adoption. A target
alone is not enough without the capability to measure
emissions, deliver reductions and maintain effective
governance. Our strongest relationships and greatest
influence sit within our direct-sourcing factory base,
which supplies around 90% of our private-label product
lines.
Most of our assessed factories currently sit at the lowest
maturity grade, reflecting the genuine starting point
across much of our supply base, while those with any
form of emissions-reduction target represent 33% of
FY26 direct-sourcing spend. By 2028, our aim is for the
majority of our direct-sourcing factories, by spend, to be
progressing beyond foundational carbon-management
practices. By 2030, our aim is for the majority to have
reached moderate maturity. We will continue reviewing
our approach as international standards, including SBTi’s
Corporate Net-Zero Standard and supplier capability
evolve.
Performance against Scope 1 and 2
targets
The table on page 29 summarises our operational GHG
emissions data for the reporting period (4 August 2025 to
2 August 2026) and our baseline data from 2023 for our
Scope 1 and market-based Scope 2 target.
Target
Reduce absolute Scope 1 and market-based
Scope 2 emissions aligned to a 1.5-degree Celsius
trajectory by 65% by 2030 compared to a 2023
base year, with a pathway to net zero operational
emissions by 2040.
FY26 Performance
In FY26, our absolute Scope 1 and market-based
Scope 2 emissions were 74.2% below our FY23
base year, exceeding our 65% reduction target for
2030 four years early. The reduction was primarily
driven by electricity matched with renewable
generation through our Lodestone Energy
partnership, alongside lower Scope 1 refrigerant
emissions following improvements to HVAC
maintenance.
We will continue to report progress against the
target while reviewing its future form and the
underlying market-based Scope 2 methodology as
international standards evolve.
Scope 1
Scope 1 emissions decreased 25.3% this year compared
with FY25, predominantly due to lower refrigerant
emissions following last year’s HVAC maintenance
programme, and the replacement of some older HVAC
units. Emissions were broadly consistent with our FY23
base year (up 1.8%).
Scope 2
Our Scope 2 market-based emissions have decreased
93% since FY23, largely due to our renewable energy
partnership with Lodestone Energy. The partnership
matches our electricity use with renewable generation
and supports investment in new renewable energy
capacity in New Zealand.
Location-based Scope 2 emissions decreased 34.7%
from FY25 and 3% from FY23. Electricity consumption
across our core New Zealand operations remained
broadly consistent with FY25, meaning the year-on-year
reduction primarily reflected a return to a less emissions-
intensive New Zealand electricity generation mix and,
consequently, lower grid-average emission factors. FY25
factors reflected increased fossil-fuelled generation during
a period of lower hydro inflows.
Scope 3
Measured Scope 3 emissions have increased 65.8% from
our FY23 base year, primarily due to higher upstream
transportation and distribution emissions.
During migration to a new emissions inventory tool, we
identified an error in data from one freight supplier that
understated FY25 Category 4 emissions by 2,422.1 tCO
2
e.
We have restated FY25 figures, increasing Category 4
emissions by 9.3% and the total measured inventory by
6.8%.
Compared with restated FY25 figures, Scope 3 emissions
increased 24.9% in FY26, including a 17.6% increase
in Category 4. This primarily reflected a combination
of higher emissions intensity under our new freight
forwarder’s supplier-specific calculations and lower
use of a lower-emissions shipping fuel mix due to
commercial considerations. Changes in data coverage
and classification also contributed, including the
reclassification of public-facing electric vehicle (EV)
charger emissions to Category 3 and the inclusion
of additional upstream and well-to-tank emissions
associated with fuels and electricity reported in Scopes 1
and 2.
During the year, we began improving freight efficiency
through a new freight-forwarding contract and fewer
stock movements between the North and South Islands.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202628
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
FY26 GHG emissions inventory
The table below summarises our operational GHG emissions data for the reporting period (4 August 2025 to 2 August 2026) and comparisons have been provided against FY25 and
our base year of FY23.
GHG Emissions (tCO
2
e)
1
This year
FY26
Last year
FY25
Base year
FY23
% change since last year% change since base year
Scope 1 2,308.8 3,088.8 2,268.2 -25.3% 1.8%
Scope 2 (Location-based) 4,922.3 7,538.1 5,067.0 -34.7% -2.9%
Scope 2 (Market-based) 638.4 3,167.3 9,176.2 -79.8% -93.0%
Sub-total: Scope 1 and 2 (Location-based) 7,231.1 10,626.9 7,335.2 -32.0% -1.4%
Sub-total: Scope 1 and 2 (Market-based) 2,947.2 6,256.1 11,444.3 -52.9% -74.2%
Scope 3
Category 3: Fuel and energy-related
activities
2,954.9 589.0 719.5 401.7% 310.7%
Category 4: Upstream transportation and
distribution
33,393.4 28,398.9 19,244.3 17.6% 73.5%
Category 5: Waste generated in operations 922.1 408.7 587.2 125.6% 57.0%
Category 6: Business travel 1,692.4 1,375.0 1,778.6 23.1% -4.8%
Category 9: Downstream freight 711.2 979.9 1,603.7 -27.4% -55.7%
Category 13: Downstream leased assets NA 11.4 NA NA NA
Sub-total: Scope 3 39,674.0 31,762.9 23,933.3 24.9% 65.8%
Total: Scope 1, 2 (Location-based) and
Scope 3 emissions
46,905.1 42,389.8 31,268.4 10.7% 50.0%
Total: Scope 1, Scope 2 (Market-based)
and Scope 3 emissions
42,621.2 38,019.0 35,377.6 12.1% 20.5%
Emissions intensity ratio (tCO
2
e / $million
of Revenue)
2
14.1 12.310.9 14.4% 29.2%
1. There are some gaps in the inventory, listed as exclusions in Table 4 in Appendix 1
2. GHG emissions intensity has been calculated using Scope 1, Scope 2 (market-based) & Scope 3 total measured emissions.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202629
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
FY26 energy consumption
1
FY26 consumptionUnitsFY26 energy (GJ)
5
Change from FY25(%)
Non-renewable fuel consumed
Diesel 455,828.4 Litres 17,594.8 -12.6
LPG
2
453,384.3 Litres 11,653.0 26.1
Petrol (all grades)
3
46,512.0 Litres 1,590.7 -15.9
Sub-total955,724.7 Litres 30,838.5 -1.3
Renewable fuel consumed
Solar PV-rooftop
4
49,926 kWh 179.7 -68.2
Sub-total49,926 kWh 179.7 -68.2
Electricity consumed
Electricity purchased75,329,226.9 kWh 271,185.2 -0.4
Sub-total75,329,226.9 kWh 271,185.2 -0.4
Total energy consumption302,203.4 -0.6
FY26 Energy intensity ratio
99.8 GJ per $m of revenue (FY25: 98.5 GJ per $m).
1. Includes diesel, LPG, petrol and electricity consumption within the Group’s New Zealand based operations aligned to our Scope 1 and 2 emissions reporting but excludes our overseas sourcing hubs and ChocolateWorks our joint venture chocolate factory.
2. LPG is reported in kilogrammes for emissions purposes and converted to litres for energy reporting.
3. Petrol (all grades) includes both regular and premium as they have identical energy content per litre despite different octane ratings.
4. Solar PV generated at our Warkworth store, all consumed on site. Generation was lower than FY25 due to reported equipment performance issues at the site.
5. Energy content factors from the Australian National Greenhouse Accounts Factors 2026 have been used for all fuel conversions to GJ. These factors are unchanged from the 2025 edition. The conversion of electricity from kWh to GJ is a standard SI conversion.
Assurance of GHG emissions
The assurance for our FY26 GHG emissions inventory has been obtained externally by Bureau Veritas. Limited assurance has been achieved for Scope 1 and 2 emissions and selected
Scope 3 emissions and energy consumption (see tables above). This assurance engagement was undertaken in accordance with International Standard on Assurance Engagements
(New Zealand) 3000: Assurance Engagements other than Audits or Reviews of Historical Financial Information; and International Standard on Assurance Engagements (New
Zealand) 3410: Assurance Engagements on Greenhouse Gas Statements, issued by the New Zealand Auditing and Assurance Standards Board; as well as informed by Bureau Veritas’
standard procedures and guidelines for external verification of sustainability reporting. See Appendix 3 for a copy of the Bureau Veritas independent limited assurance report.
Change in energy consumption from FY25
1,791.6 GJ reduction (0.6%) compared to FY25
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202630
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
The Group recognises that robust corporate governance
and management of sustainability risks and opportunities,
including climate-related matters, are essential to
protecting and growing our business in the interests of
customers, team members and stakeholders, and creating
long-term sustainable returns for shareholders.
The Role of our Board
As part of a wider effort to streamline the Group’s
management and governance arrangements, a number
of important changes were made this year. In November
2025, the Board decided to disestablish the Environmental
and Social Sustainability Committee. Its responsibilities
transferred to the Board, with related risk management
and non-financial reporting responsibilities moving to
the Audit and Risk Committee (ARC). The Board and ARC
Charters were updated in April 2026 to reflect this.
The Board now directly oversees the Group’s sustainability
strategy, sets objectives and targets, holds Management
accountable, and approves this report ahead of
publication. The Board meets at least nine times a year.
During the year, the Board received monthly updates
on sustainability matters. It also considered how our
sustainability priorities align with the Group’s wider
strategy.
The ARC, under its amended Charter, oversees
sustainability-related risk management as part of the
Group’s overall approach to enterprise risk management
and non-financial reporting, including this report, the
assurance framework, and management’s progress against
our objectives, metrics and targets. It meets at least four
times a year, and in June 2026 was updated on progress
against sustainability-related risks and our approach
to FY26 sustainability reporting as a result of proposed
changes to the mandatory climate-related disclosures
regime.
The Role of our
Management Team
Consistent with the above changes, responsibility for
driving delivery of our sustainability priorities across the
business now sits directly with our Executive Leadership
Team (ELT), supported by senior managers and functional
teams across the Group. The CEO is accountable for
delivery of the Group’s sustainability programme,
supported on the ELT by the Chief Legal, Corporate Affairs
and Sustainability Officer. Day to day, our Sustainability
and Ethical Sourcing team, led by the GM Sustainability
and Ethical Sourcing, shapes strategy, policy and
reporting, working closely with Internal Audit and Risk,
Corporate Strategy, and Legal and Corporate Affairs.
During the year, the ELT reviewed how our sustainability
approach aligns with the Group’s broader strategic
direction as part of the wider strategy process. This
included how community and people agendas sit
alongside our long-standing environmental commitments.
Managing
Sustainability-related
Risks
The Group’s Enterprise Risk Management Framework,
approved by the ELT, applies to all enterprise risks across
four categories: strategic, financial, operational and
business. It enables us to identify, assess, control and
monitor risk while responding to a fast-moving retail
environment. Management-level responsibility sits with
the ELT, supported by the Head of Internal Audit and Risk,
GMs and senior manager risk stewards, with risk insights
reported periodically to the ELT and ARC.
A significant step this year has been to bring our
sustainability-related risks fully inside this framework.
Although we expect to fall outside the mandatory climate-
related disclosures regime, we continue to assess and
respond to the key climate-related risks identified through
our earlier disclosure work. Sustainability-related risks are
now managed alongside the Group’s other key risks under
three areas: climate-related disruption, human rights and
modern slavery, and sustainable business practices. For
each, we have identified primary mitigations and controls,
and progress is monitored and reported to the ELT and
ARC each quarter. Key risk indicators have been identified
for each, though a number are still being developed and
refined as data and reporting processes mature.
Sustainability-related opportunities continue to be
identified and progressed through our wider sustainability
strategy work.
Sustainability Risk Profile 2026
Details of our Group risk management framework
are included in our FY26 Annual Report. Here, we
summarise the key changes to our sustainability-
related risks during the past 12 months:
• Overall, our sustainability-related risks remained
broadly stable, with existing mitigations
considered appropriate to the current risk
profile.
• Brand and reputational trust, our ability to meet
stakeholder expectations across environmental,
social and ethical matters, continues to be an
area of focus, as customers, investors and other
stakeholders increasingly expect to see clear
evidence of action, not just intent.
• Climate-related disruption remains an area we
are watching closely. New Zealand experienced
repeated extreme weather events during the
year, resulting in numerous local states of
emergency. The Group continued to experience
associated trading and operational disruption,
the most significant being the extended closure
of our Oamaru Noel Leeming store following
severe flooding in July 2026. However, these
events were not considered material in financial
terms.
• Human rights and modern slavery, and broader
sustainable business practices risk, continue
to be actively monitored, particularly given
uncertainty regarding the timing and progress
of proposed legislation, including modern
slavery and product stewardship reforms,
ahead of the New Zealand General Election in
November 2026, which might influence our
assessment of these risks and the processes and
mitigations required to manage them.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202632
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Our Approach
to Sustainability
GRI DisclosuresAppendices
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Global Reporting Initiative
(GRI) Disclosures
The Group has reported in accordance with the GRI Standards for the period 4 August
2025 to 2 August 2026. In preparing this report, we applied the GRI reporting principles
of Accuracy, Balance, Clarity, Comparability, Completeness, Sustainability Context,
Timeliness and Verifiability.
We reviewed our material topics through an internal assessment involving the ELT
and selected direct reports. The assessment considered the significance of the Group’s
impacts on the economy, environment and people, alongside stakeholder importance
and the operational and financial relevance of each topic to the Group. It also considered
actual and potential impacts on people and the environment, informed by operational
knowledge and ongoing stakeholder engagement.
The review reaffirmed our existing material topics and identified community impact as an
additional topic, reflecting the importance of our role in supporting communities across
Aotearoa New Zealand. No other significant changes were identified.
The assessment informed the material topics and related disclosures in this report in
accordance with GRI 3: Material Topics 2021. The following pages explain why each topic is
material, how the Group manages its impacts and how performance is measured.
The Group operates in the New Zealand retail sector, for which no GRI Sector Standard is
currently available. Refer to pages 35-43 for the GRI Content Index.
Material Topics
Importance to Stakeholders
1.002.003.004.005.00
5.00
4.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.00
Value at Stake
Sustainable products and packaging
Waste reduction
Employee engagement, diversity and inclusion
Supply chain management
Responsible and ethical sourcing
Community impact
GHG emissions
Employee health, safety and wellbeing
Business ethics and human rights
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202634
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting
Material Topic Impact / Commitment How we measure performance GRI Reporting
Standard
Where reported
Sustainable products
and packaging
To increase the share of private label sales from products
with at least one approved sustainability attribute to
100% by 2035.
Percentage of private-label sales derived from products with one or more sustainability
features.
N/ASustainability Report
p.10
To phase out unnecessary or problematic single use
plastics from our private label products and ensure all
product packaging meets our sustainability requirements
by 2035.
Percentage of private-label sales derived from products with packaging which can be
recycled via New Zealand’s kerbside recycling infrastructure, or circularity solutions.
N/ASustainability Report
p.10
To pilot at least one innovative proposition or initiative
each year which aims to help products last longer or
reduce waste.
Number of initiatives each year which help products last longer, or help customers reduce
waste.
N/ASustainability Report
pp.10–13
Supply chain
management
To build a reliable and sustainable supply chain networkStockturn.N/AAnnual Report
pp.14–15 and 18–19
Supplier assessments and results.GRI 414-1
GRI 414-2
Sustainability Report
pp.20–23
GHG emissionsTo reduce Scope 1 and market-based Scope 2 emissions,
aligned to a 1.5-degree Celsius trajectory, by 65% by 2030
compared to FY23 base year and on a pathway to net zero
operational emissions by 2040.
Absolute Scope 1 and market-based Scope 2 emissions, measured against the FY23 base
year.
GRI 305-1
GRI 305-2
Sustainability Report
pp.27–29, 46, 50
To progress meaningful Scope 3 emissions reductions in
high-impact and influenceable areas.
Progress in improving data and methodologies for significant Scope 3 categories, together
with supplier carbon-management maturity and measured Scope 3 emissions.
GRI 305-3Sustainability Report
pp.27–29, 47–49
To meaningfully improve the energy-efficiency of our
buildings and domestic and international logistics
activities by 2030 (compared to 2023).
Total energy consumption, energy intensity and reductions in energy consumption,
together with progress on building and logistics efficiency initiatives.
GRI 302-1
GRI 302-3
GRI 302-4
Sustainability Report
p.30
Waste reductionTo demonstrably reduce total waste from our activities
in New Zealand and divert at least 90% of waste that’s
produced from landfill by 2035.
Percentage of waste diverted from landfill year on year.GRI 306-1
GRI 306-2
GRI 306-3
GRI 306-4
GRI 306-5
Sustainability Report
p.11, p.51
To enable at least 80% of Kiwis to access solutions to
reuse or recycle a minimum of five difficult to recycle
items by 2035.
Number of tonnes of post-consumer waste recycled.N/ASustainability Report
pp.10–13
Responsible and ethical
sourcing
We will source ethically and responsibly. Number of new and existing production sites assessed against social and environmental
criteria, assessment results and actions taken in response to identified impacts.
GRI 308-1
GRI 308-2
GRI 407-1
GRI 408-1
GRI 409-1
GRI 414-1
GRI 414-2
Sustainability Report
pp.20–23
To build carbon-management maturity across our direct-
sourcing factories.
Percentage of direct-sourcing private-label factory spend covered by independently
verified carbon-management maturity assessments, and the proportion of assessed
factories progressing beyond foundational maturity.
GRI 305-3Sustainability Report
p.28
Membership of relevant sustainability initiatives and associationsGRI 2-28Sustainability Report
p.52
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202635
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
Material Topic Impact / Commitment How we measure performance GRI Reporting
Standard
Where reported
Employee health, safety
and wellbeing
To provide a safe and supportive workplace and promote
the health and wellbeing of our team members.
Number of violent and aggressive behaviour events
Number of recorded critical risk events
Total Recordable Injury Frequency Rate
Lost Time Injury Frequency Rate
Workplace fatalities
GRI 403-9Sustainability Report
p.16
Employee engagement,
diversity and inclusion
To foster an engaged, diverse and inclusive culture in
which team members can develop, feel connected and
thrive.
Employee Net Promoter Score and MyVoice participation
Learning hours and participation in leadership and capability programmes
Programmes for upgrading employee skills
Promotion of worker health and wellbeing
GRI 403-6
GRI 404-1
GRI 404-2
Pages 15–16
Percentage of senior leaders who are women
Group-wide median gender pay gap
GRI 405-1
GRI 405-2
Annual Report
pp.74–75
Sustainability Report
p.16
Business ethics and
human rights
To operate ethically, respect human rights and report
openly and transparently on our policies, impacts and
performance.
Adherence to NZX Corporate Governance Code, Principle 1GRI 2-23 to 2-27Annual Report p.64
Compliance with Code of Ethics, Financial Products Trading Policy and Market Disclosure
Policy
GRI 205-2
GRI 205-3
GRI 206-1
Annual Report p.64
Sustainability Report
pp.20–22
Supplier and production-site labour, human-rights, social and environmental assessments,
findings and corrective actions.
GRI 407-1
GRI 408-1
GRI 409-1
GRI 414-1
GRI 414-2
Sustainability Report
pp.20–23
Community impactTo support New Zealand communities through long-term
partnerships, community investment and programmes
that respond to local needs.
Value contributed to charities and community organisations; funds raised by customers
and team members; volunteering hours; and participation in key community and youth
programmes.
GRI 3-3Sustainability Report
pp.18–19
General Disclosures
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
2-1 Organisation details Directory (AR)
Financial Statements, Note 1.1 (AR)
About The Warehouse Group (SR)
24–25, 38–39, 82–838
2-2 Entities included in the organisation’s sustainability
reporting
Financial Statement, Note 1.3 (AR)
About this report (SR)
Methodology for measuring GHG emissions (SR)
Appendix 1 (SR)
38–392, 27, 45–46
2-3 Reporting period, frequency and contact point Financial Statements, Note 1.5 (AR)
About this report (SR)
38–392
2-4 Restatements of information Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)-28–29
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202636
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
2-5 External assurance Assurance of GHG emissions (SR)
Appendix 3 (SR)
-30, 53–54
2-6 Activities, value chain and other business relationships Our Brands (AR)
About The Warehouse Group (SR)
Our value chain (SR)
24–25, 26–318
2-7 Employees Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion (AR)
Our People (SR)
74–7515–16
2-8 Workers who are not employees A small number of workers who are not employees perform services on the Group’s sites
through third-party contract arrangements. These workers are not controlled by the Group.
--
2-9 Governance structure and composition Corporate Governance (AR)64–67-
2-10 Nomination and selection of the highest governance
body
Governance Report – Board Composition and Performance (AR)64–65-
2-11 Chair of the highest governance body Corporate Governance – Chair (AR)64-65-
2-12 Role of the highest governance body in overseeing the
management of impacts
Corporate Governance – Board Committees (AR)
Our approach to sustainability governance and risk management (SR)
www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/about-us/corporate-governance
66–6732
2-13 Delegation of responsibility for managing impacts Our Board (AR)
Executive Leadership Team (AR)
Board Committees (AR)
Role of our management team (SR)
60–63, 66–6732
2-14 Role of the highest governance body in sustainability
reporting
Board Committees (AR)
Role of our Board (SR)
www.thewarehousegroup.co.nz/about-us/corporate-governance
66–6732
2-15 Conflicts of interest Director Independence and Conflicts (AR)
Directors Shareholding and Substantial Product Holders (AR)
64–65, 76–77-
2-16 Communication of critical concerns Risk Management (AR)
Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)
20–23, 64, 72–73-
2-17 Collective knowledge of the highest Governance body Corporate Governance – Board Skills Matrix (AR)66–67-
2-18 Evaluation of the performance of the highest Governance
body
Corporate Governance – Board Evaluation (AR)66–67-
2-19 Remuneration Policies Remuneration Report (AR)68–70-
2-20 Process to determine remuneration Remuneration Report (AR)68–70-
2-21 Annual compensation ratio Remuneration Report (AR)71
2-22 Statement of sustainable development strategy Our Sustainable Living Plan (SR)
Transition planning (SR)
Overview of our Climate Transition Plan (SR)
-9, 25–26
2-23 Policy commitments Group Corporate Governance and Policies (AR, website)
Ethical Sourcing Policy (SR, website)
6420
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202637
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
2-24 Embedding policy commitments Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)
Reporting and Disclosure (AR)
Risk Management (AR)
Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion (AR)
Our Sustainable Living Plan (SR)
Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)
64, 68, 74–759, 20–23
2-25 Processes to remediate negative impacts Risk Management (AR)
Financial Risk Management, Note 12 (AR)
Corporate Governance – Risk Management (AR)
Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
Audit performance and findings (SR)
Supplier engagement & development (SR)
20–23, 48–50, 72–7320, 22–23
2-26 Mechanisms for seeking advice and raising concerns Risk Management (AR)
Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards, Code of Ethics (AR)
20–23, 64-
2-27 Compliance with laws and regulations The Warehouse pleaded guilty to nine representative charges laid by the Commerce
Commission for supplying, offering to supply and/or advertising to supply a Roo Crew Take-
Apart Vehicle toy with 3 variants that did not meet the relevant Product Safety Standards
(Children’s Toys) Regulations 2005. A fine was imposed of $234,000. There have been no
other significant instances or fines imposed for non-compliance with laws and regulations
during the reporting period.
--
2-28 Membership associations Appendix 2 – Initiatives and Associations -52
2-29 Approach to stakeholder engagements Integrated Report (AR)
Our People (SR)
Our Communities (SR)
Global Reporting Initiative Disclosures (SR)
18–1915–16, 18–19, 34
2-30 Collective bargaining agreements Currently, 16.9% of our employees are covered by collective agreements. --
Material Topics
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-1 Process to determine material topics Global Reporting Initiative Disclosures (SR)-34
3-2 List of material topics Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)-34
3-3 Management of material topics Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting and relevant topic sections (SR)-35–36
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202638
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
Topic Disclosures – Economic
GRI 205: Anti-Corruption (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)
Risk Management (AR)
Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)
20–23, 6420, 35–36
205-2 Communication and training about anti-corruption
policies and procedures
In FY26, our Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy was communicated to all new team
members, and team members across the business were assigned mandatory Anti-Bribery
and Corruption training. Overall, 95.5% of team members completed the training, including
82.7% of Store Support Office team members, 97.7% of Store team members and 94%
of Distribution Centre team members. Team members will be required to complete the
training again in 2028.
--
205-3 Confirmed incidents of corruption and actions taken Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
Audit performance and findings (SR)
-20, 22
GRI 206: Anti-Competitive Behaviour (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
Risk Management (AR)
Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)
20–23, 6435–36
206-1 Legal actions for anti-competitive behaviour, anti-trust
and monopoly practices
We are not aware of any legal cases against the organisation regarding anti-competitive
behaviour or violations of anti-trust and monopoly legislation during the reporting period.
--
Topic Disclosures – Environmental
GRI 302: Energy (2016)
StandardDisclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)
Our Sustainable Living Plan – Sustainable Operations (SR)
Transition planning (SR)
Metrics and Targets – Energy consumption (SR)
Governance and risk management (SR)
Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
18–199, 11, 25, 30, 32, 35
302-1 Energy consumption within the organisation Metrics and Targets – Energy consumption (SR) -30
302-3 Energy intensity Metrics and Targets – Energy consumption (SR)-30
302-4 Reduction of energy consumption Metrics and Targets – Energy consumption (SR)- 30
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202639
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
GRI 305: Emissions (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)
Our Sustainable Living Plan (SR)
Our Climate Transition and Emissions (SR)
Governance and risk management (SR)
Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
18–199, 25–26, 32, 35
305-1 Scope 1 GHG emissions Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)-29, 46, 50
305-2 Scope 2 GHG emissions Scope 1 and 2 targets (SR)
Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)
-27, 29, 46, 50
305-3 Scope 3 GHG emissions Emissions categories (SR)
Methodology for measuring GHG emissions (SR)
Scope 3 priorities and supplier engagement (SR)
Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)
-27–29, 47–49
305-4 GHG emissions intensity Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)-29
305-5 Reduction of GHG emissionsPerformance against Scope 1 and 2 targets (SR)
Metrics and Targets – GHG emissions inventory (SR)
-28–29
GRI 306: Waste (2020)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)
Our Sustainable Living Plan – Circular Solutions and Sustainable Operations (SR)
Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
Governance and risk management (SR)
18–1910–11, 32, 35
306-1 Waste generation and significant waste-related impacts Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste and Post Consumer Solutions -11
306-2 Management of significant waste-related impacts Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste and Post Consumer Solutions (SR)
Transition planning (SR)
-11, 25
306-3 Waste generated Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste (SR)
Metrics and Targets – GHG inventory, Scope 3 Category 5 (SR)
-11, 29
306-4 Waste diverted from disposal Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste and Post Consumer Solutions (SR)-11
306-5 Waste directed to disposal Our Sustainable Living Plan – Reduced Waste (SR)-11
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202640
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
GRI 307: Environmental Compliance (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)
Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
Governance and risk management (SR)
18–2332, 35–36
307-1 Non-compliance with environmental laws and
regulations
We are not aware of any incidents related to non-compliance with environmental laws and
regulations during the reporting period.
--
GRI 308: Supplier Environmental Assessment (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)
Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)
-20–21
308-1 New suppliers that were screened using environmental
criteria
Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)
-20–21
308-2 Negative environmental impacts in the supply chain and
actions taken
Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
Audit performance and findings (SR)
-20,22
Topic Disclosures – Social
GRI 403: Occupational Health and Safety (2018)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)- Corporate Governance – Board Responsibilities (AR)
Corporate Governance – Health, Safety and Wellbeing Committee (AR)
Corporate Governance – Risk Management (AR)
Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
Our People – Health and safety (SR)
Governance and risk management (SR)
18–19, 64, 66–67, 72–7316, 32, 35–36
403-6 Promotion of worker health Our People – Wellbeing, Inclusion and Belonging (SR)-16
403-9 Work-related injuries Our People – Health and safety (SR)-16
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202641
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
GRI 404: Training and Education (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)
Corporate Governance – Board Responsibilities (AR)
Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
Our People – Growing Leaders and Capability (SR)
18–19, 6415, 35–36
404-1 Average hours of training per year per
employee
Our People – FY26 People & Culture Snapshot (SR)-15
404-2 Programmes for upgrading employee skills and
transition assistance programs
Our People – Growing Leaders and Capability (SR)
Looking Ahead (SR)
-15–16
GRI 405: Diversity and Equal Opportunity (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management of material topics Integrated Report (AR)
Corporate Governance – Board Responsibilities (AR)
Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
Our People – Wellbeing, Inclusion and Belonging (SR)
18–19, 6416, 35–36
405-1 Diversity of governance bodies and employees Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion (AR)
Our People – Wellbeing, Inclusion and Belonging (SR)
74–7516
405-2 Ratio of basic salary and remuneration of
women to men
Celebrating Diversity and Inclusion (AR)
Our People – Wellbeing, Inclusion and Belonging (SR)
7516
GRI 407: Freedom of Association and Collective Bargaining (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management approach Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)
Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)
Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)
6420
407-1 Operations and suppliers in which the right
to freedom of association and collective
bargaining may be at risk
Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
Supplier engagement & development (SR)
-20, 23
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202642
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
GRI 408: Child Labour (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management approach Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)
Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)
FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)
Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)
6420–21
408-1 Operations and suppliers at significant risk for
incidents of child labour
Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
Audit performance and findings (SR)
-20, 22
GRI 409: Forced or Compulsory Labour (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management Approach Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)
Trading Ethically and Responsibly (SR)
FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)
Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)
6420–21
409-1 Operations and suppliers at significant risk for
incidents of forced or compulsory labour
Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
Audit performance and findings (SR)
-20, 22
GRI 414: Supplier Social Assessment (2016)
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management approach Corporate Governance – Ethical Standards (AR)
Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
Supplier engagement & development (SR)
FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)
Ethical Sourcing Policy (website)
6420–21, 23
414-1 New suppliers that were screened using social
criteria
Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
FY26 Ethical Sourcing Programme (SR)
-20–21
414-2 Negative social impacts in the supply chain and
actions taken
Trading Ethically and Responsibly – Assessment and monitoring (SR)
Audit performance and findings (SR)
Supplier engagement & development (SR)
-20, 22–23
Community Impact
Standard Disclosure Location of disclosure / response Annual Report Page
Reference
Sustainability Report
Page Reference
3-3 Management approach Material Topics – Assessment and Reporting (SR)
Our Communities (SR)
Products that give back (SR)
Supporting Youth Pathways (SR)
-18–19, 35–36
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202643
GRI Disclosures
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
Appendices
Appendices
Appendix 1 – Greenhouse Gas Emissions Inventory Criteria
Table 1: The Warehouse Group FY26 Organisational Boundary
Entity Name Location Operational Control Emissions Source/Sink
1-Day Liquor Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
Bond and Bond Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
Boye Developments Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
ChocolateWorks NZ Limited New Zealand Yes Yes
Eldamos Investments Limited New Zealand Yes Yes
Eldamos Nominees Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
Lincoln West Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
Farran (Nine) Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
Noel Leeming Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
Noel Leeming Finance Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
Noel Leeming Financial Services Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
Noel Leeming Furniture Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
The Book Depot Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
The Market.com Limited New Zealand Yes No (amalgamated non-trading entity)
The Warehouse Group Limited New Zealand Yes No (holding company)
The Warehouse Limited New Zealand and Bangladesh Yes Yes
The Warehouse Card Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
The Warehouse Group Support Services Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
The Warehouse Investments Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited New Zealand No No
The Warehouse Management Trustee Company Limited No. 2 New Zealand No No
The Warehouse Nominees Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
The Warehouse Planit Trustees Limited New Zealand No No (non-trading entity)
The Warehouse (Shanghai) Trading Company LimitedChinaYesYes
TWGI Operations Limited New Zealand No No (non-trading entity)
TWGA Pty Limited Australia No No (non-trading entity)
TW House Sourcing Private Limited (India) India Yes Partial – ceased operations in April 2026
TWL Australia Pty Limited Australia Yes No (non-trading entity)
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202645
Appendices
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
GRI Disclosures
Entity Name Location Operational Control Emissions Source/Sink
TWP No.1 Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
TWP No.4 Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
TWP No.5 Limited New Zealand Yes No (non-trading entity)
Warehouse Stationery Limited New Zealand No No (non-trading entity)
Table 2: FY26 GHG and GWP Emissions Sources Included
The Group uses Watershed as its GHG inventory management system and applies the relevant Ministry for the Environment 2026 emission factors. The table below describes our
methodology, estimates, limitations, and instances where we have relied on other emission factors. These factors include BraveTrace’s Residual Supply mix factor, the guarantee-of-
origin emission factor applied to our LNG and biomethane shipping fuel mix, and supplier emission factors. Table 4 details the exclusions to our methodology and inventory.
GHG Protocol Category Emissions Source Methodology, Estimates and Limitations
Scope 1Mobile Combustion - Fleet
Fuel (Petrol and Diesel)
Stationary Combustion - LPG
and diesel
Fugitive Emissions -
Refrigerant Gas
Mobile Combustion
Monthly invoices and reports from our fleet-management supplier provide fuel-consumption data. The Group’s fleet includes light passenger vehicles used by Store
Support Office and regional managers; light commercial vehicles, primarily used by Noel Leeming Tech Solutions; and vehicles used to deliver Noel Leeming whiteware.
MfE 2026 mobile-combustion emission factors for premium petrol, regular petrol and diesel have been applied. We have a high level of confidence in this data.
Stationary Combustion
Monthly diesel and LPG exchange-cylinder reports are used to calculate emissions. Diesel is reported in litres, while LPG is reported in kilogrammes for emissions
purposes. The calculation assumes that the supplier reports are complete and accurate. The LPG is used in equipment such as forklifts and straddles. We also receive
reports for diesel consumed in operating stores, including sprinkler-pump systems. 2026 MfE Stationary Combustion Emissions factors for LPG and Diesel have been
applied to these emissions. We have a medium level of confidence in this data from our supplier.
Refrigerants
The HVAC systems in our stores and sites are regularly maintained by external contractors, who report the refrigerant top-ups. There is some uncertainty because
refrigerant emissions are calculated based on recorded refrigerant top-ups, which may not capture all leakage. Refrigerants used include HCFC-22 (R-22, Genetron 22 or
Freon 22), HFC-32, R-407C, R-410A, and R-438A. AR5 GWP100 factors sourced from 2026 MfE have been applied. We have a medium level of confidence in this data.
Scope 2Purchased electricity A third-party energy-management company verifies our monthly electricity invoices and raises billing, charge and consumption alerts during the data-import process. It
also provides a consolidated summary of total consumption and cost to support reconciliation with supplier invoices.
At four sites, electricity is supplied through the landlord, with billing and verification managed monthly by our finance team.
Some sites have non-time-of-use meters, and estimates are applied where invoices are not received in time for reporting. Overall, we have a medium level of confidence
in this data.
Purchased electricity for the Group’s India sourcing operations is included until April 2026, when TWG-owned operations ceased.
Location-based Emissions
The monthly electricity invoicing and reports provided to the Group are used to derive full-year consumption and converted to tCO
2
e. The emission factor applied to the
location-based emissions for the Group was sourced from Watershed using the MfE 2026 purchased grid-average electricity - calendar quarters. If quarterly electricity
emissions factors are not available for a specific quarter, the annual average value published by MfE (0.0786625) is used as a proxy. This approach has been taken in
preference to applying the same quarter from the previous year, as grid emission factors have fallen significantly year-on-year, meaning prior-year factors would produce
a less accurate result.
Market-based Emissions
The emissions factor applied to the market-based emissions for the Group was sourced from Watershed and aligns to the Residual Supply Factor (kg CO
2
e/MWh) sourced
from BraveTrace, released in August 2026. 67,684 NZEC Renewable energy certificates, which are maintained by BraveTrace, have been applied to our FY26 market-
based Emissions. The NZECs reduced our Scope 2 market-based emissions by 4,470.04 tCO
2
e. This was calculated using an annual average of the Residual Supply Factor
sourced from BraveTrace (66.05 kg CO
2
e/MWh for the 2025/2026 production year). We were not able to calculate reductions using the monthly equivalent emission factor
due to functionality limitations in our inventory management system meaning we were not able to amend this calculation. We believe the difference resulting from this
approach is immaterial and impacts our Scope 2 market-based emissions by <1%.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202646
Appendices
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
GRI Disclosures
GHG Protocol Category Emissions Source Methodology, Estimates and Limitations
Scope 3: Category 3Fuel and Energy Related
Activities
Transmission and Distribution Losses
This is the same methodology as Scope 2 emissions; however, the equivalent T&D loss emission factor is applied using MfE’s 2026 emission factors. We have a medium
level of confidence in this data as it relies on the accuracy of our Scope 2 data.
Fleet (EV charging)
Electricity consumption associated with charging our electric and plug-in hybrid passenger fleet is based on monthly invoices and reports provided by our fleet
management supplier. We apply the location-based emission factor for purchased electricity using the MfE 2026 purchased grid-average electricity - calendar quarters.
If quarterly electricity emissions factors are not available for a specific quarter, the quarterly emissions factor for the same quarter in the previous year is used as a proxy.
Our supplier is highly confident in this data.
Public facing EV charging
Monthly ChargeNet totals are obtained for each site and included in the inventory. We apply the location-based emission factor for purchased electricity using the MfE
2026 purchased grid-average electricity - calendar quarters. If quarterly electricity emissions factors are not available for a specific quarter, the quarterly emissions factor
for the same quarter in the previous year is used as a proxy. Our supplier is highly confident in this data.
Scope 3: Category 4Upstream Transportation &
Distribution
The Group tracks upstream transportation and distribution through three freight arrangements:
1. FOB (Free on Board). This is freight where the supplier is responsible for the goods until they are loaded onto a ship or a plane. This arrangement is common for stock
purchased by The Warehouse and Warehouse Stationery.
2. FID (Free into Distribution Centre). This is freight where the supplier is responsible for the goods until they are delivered to one of our DCs.
3. FIS (Free into Store). This is freight where the supplier is responsible for the goods until they are delivered into a store. This is common for Noel Leeming stock.
For FOB we calculate international freight emissions for products and the domestic freight emissions for these products as they move to our Distribution Centres (DC)
and stores. For FID and FIS, we calculate the associated freight from the point we order the stock. For example, if a washing machine is purchased FIS for Noel Leeming,
we calculate the freight from the location of the washing machine when we order it, through to its delivery in store.
Suppliers provide us with freight reports monthly. Our freight reporting has significant uncertainties and limitations. These are primarily due to the bespoke
methodologies between suppliers and the limited visibility on all freight movements within our value chain. We will continue to work with our suppliers to understand
and address these issues. Each supplier’s data and emissions calculations rely on various assumptions, methods, and limitations. They also use different approaches to
determining the underlying quantity/activity data, which can vary in availability, support, and quality.
International Sea and Air Freight Suppliers
Our international freight forwarders provide us with monthly freight data, which we use to calculate full-year freight activity and associated tCO
2
e using supplier-specific
methodologies. We have a high level of confidence in this data. The 2026 MfE emission factors for short- and long-haul air freight and bulk carrier shipping have been
applied to the inventory, depending on the mode of transport. This excludes shipping containers covered by the fossil-based LNG and biomethane mix factor described
below. We continued to work with our sea freight partners to purchase a fossil-based LNG and biomethane shipping fuel mix supported by guarantees of origin.
However, the associated emissions reduction was 43.5% lower than in FY25, reducing the benefit from this lower-emissions fuel mix. This is a mass-balance mechanism
that allows us to purchase a lower-emissions fuel mix, even though the physical fuel used for our shipments may not be the same fuel or mix. For the shipments covered,
the fuel mix can reduce well-to-wake emissions by up to 25%. Well-to-wake emissions include all upstream and downstream marine fuel emissions, including fuel
production, delivery and use on board ships. The guarantee of origin declarations meet the requirements of the Clean Cargo Working Group and ISO 14020, ISO 14021
and ISO 14067, allowing the relevant tCO
2
e reductions to be allocated to our shipments. These declarations are provided quarterly and verified against our international
sea freight movements.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202647
Appendices
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
GRI Disclosures
GHG Protocol Category Emissions Source Methodology, Estimates and Limitations
Scope 3: Category 4Upstream Transportation &
Distribution
NZ Ports
We rely on the monthly emissions calculations from our South Island port using both road and rail freight. This calculation includes container movements at the
terminal, transport to the Midland Port, unloading at the Midland Port, the return journey to our South Island distribution centre, unloading at the distribution centre,
and the return of containers to the Midland Port. This calculation is based on generally accepted practices and standards when it is prepared. It relies on third-party
data and assumptions. Key assumptions include that road transport distances are based on the shortest possible routes and do not include deviations and assume full
container weight of 16 tonnes and empty container weight of 2.5 tonnes. We have a high level of confidence in these calculations.
Domestic Road, Rail, and Sea Freight
We use several road, rail and sea-freight suppliers to transport our freight from the holding park in Auckland, and Midland Port in Christchurch to our distribution centres
and stores. Two of these suppliers provide us with monthly reports using tonnes/km per trip, which we convert into tCO
2
e. When the trip involves travel over the Cook
Strait, and the supplier has not calculated this, an additional 97.6km is assumed. We have a medium confidence level in this data as we have limited information on
the exact stock in each trip and the suppliers’ own assumptions in preparing these reports. 2026 MfE emission factors for Longhaul heavy trucks, urban heavy trucks,
all trucks and inter-island ferries have been applied. One supplier provides us with monthly emission calculations. They assume crossing the Cook Strait is equivalent to
96.304 km. Emission sources include long haul heavy trucks, urban delivery heavy trucks, and all truck tonnes/km converted to tCO
2
e. Emission factors are sourced from
2026 MfE emission factors. They have provided us with a clear methodology. We have a medium level of confidence in this data. One supplier uses fuel usage for each
route/mode and applies the emission factor sourced from the 2025 MfE Emissions guide to calculate the total carbon emission. The total carbon emission is then divided
by its capacity to calculate the carbon per tonne. This figure is then used by the monthly km for that route to determine the tonnes of carbon emissions per month. We
have a medium level of confidence in this data as we have limited information on suppliers’ assumptions in preparing these reports.
Last Mile Road Freight
We receive reports from one of our suppliers about bulk item deliveries to our customers. Our supplier provides us with monthly reports using tonnes/km per trip we
convert this into tCO
2
e. We have a medium level of confidence in this data. 2026 MfE emissions factors for Freight Road trucks have been applied.
Non-Trade Procurement Freight
For non-trade procurement freight not covered in the above, our supplier provides us with reports with the weight, distance and pre-calculated CO
2
e of the freight. We
have a medium level of confidence in this data because the underlying transaction-level data is not available to us.
Scope 3: Category 5Waste Generated in
Operations
The data is reported monthly by waste collection providers, who weigh materials as they are collected and provide reports in kilogrammes or tonnes. This data is
converted to tCO
2
e. Supplier-reported waste data is available for the majority of our estate. Waste volumes for 10 store locations are currently estimated using waste
profiles from comparable stores, primarily where sites are located within shopping malls or where waste services are managed by local councils or municipalities and
detailed waste reporting is not available. Construction waste is included in the inventory.
Emissions are calculated using factors from Section 10.3 Waste Disposal of the Ministry for the Environment’s Measuring Emissions Catalogue 2026. Where the
destination landfill is known, the relevant landfill-specific emissions factor is applied. In Hawke’s Bay and Dunedin, waste service providers consolidate waste before
transferring it to one of several landfills in the region, some with landfill gas recovery and some without. Because the final destination landfill cannot be confirmed in
these locations, we take a conservative approach and apply the emissions factor for landfills without gas recovery. We have a medium level of confidence in the overall
waste data due to these uncertainties.
Waste from ChocolateWorks, which forms part of the Group’s organisational boundary, is reported monthly in tonnes by both of its waste collection providers. As actual
monthly waste volumes are now available, no assumptions are required regarding waste weights. The relevant 2026 waste-disposal emissions factors are applied to
these reported volumes.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202648
Appendices
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
GRI Disclosures
GHG Protocol Category Emissions Source Methodology, Estimates and Limitations
Scope 3: Category 6Business TravelFlights
The Group uses a flight booking agency to book all travel. The Group changed travel providers at the start of FY26, meaning that data was received from both providers
for a period while pre-existing bookings made through the former provider were fulfilled. A monthly report is provided that includes flight information, including
distance travelled, flight type (short/long haul), and cabin class. These are used to calculate the emissions. The data sources are considered reliable. We have a high level
of confidence in this data. 2026 MfE emissions factors for domestic, long-haul and short-haul business air travel have been applied. Specific cabin class factors were also
applied for long and short haul travel.
Hotels
The reports for accommodation include location (city and country), the service provider, date travelled, room type, and pre-calculated kgCO
2
e. The data sources are
considered reliable. We have a high level of confidence in this data. The emissions factor relevant to the applicable country is applied. Where no data is available, the New
Zealand room rate is applied which is derived from 2026 MfE emission factors.
Rental Vehicles
The rental vehicle report includes location, travel date, service provider, vehicle type and estimated mileage. We have a medium level of confidence in this data as the
mileage is estimated rather than actual. The travel booking agency has specific emissions factors for each car type (at a mode level - e.g. electric). We retain a copy of
their calculation methodology.
Private Vehicles
When our team members travel in their private vehicles, their km travelled is converted into tCO
2
e. This assumes accurate record-keeping by team members. We have a
medium level of confidence in this data. The 2026 MfE emissions factors for car average, unknown fuel type have been applied.
Other Sources
In FY25, we began reporting on business travel for several other entities that sit under the Group’s operational control. We have a medium level of confidence in this data
as we have seen improvements to the data quality since last FY. The same emissions factors as above have been applied.
Scope 3: Category 9Downstream Transportation &
Distribution
We use NZ Post’s calculation for products couriered to our customers from online sales. We are provided a monthly breakdown of carbon emissions across parcels,
pickup, processing, transportation, and delivery, and the total emissions are divided by the volume of parcels to calculate average emissions per parcel. This report
produces a customer profile emissions report associated with GHGs and is verified by Toitū Envirocare. The report is produced with an independently verified data
methodology for a transport measurement of delivery services’ environmental impact, and the data is suitable for auditing an ISO 14064-1:2018 and GHG Protocol
inventory. We have a high level of confidence in this data.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202649
Appendices
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
GRI Disclosures
Table 3: FY26 Scope 1 & Location-Based Scope 2 GHG Gases Breakdown
This table breaks down the Group’s FY26 Scope 1 and location-based Scope 2 emissions by source and by greenhouse gas, showing both carbon dioxide equivalent emissions (tCO
2
e)
and the underlying mass of each gas emitted.
TotalGHG CO
2
EQUIVALENTSGHG MASS
Emissions
1
tCO
2
e
2
CO
2
(tCO
2
e)
CH
4
(tCO
2
e)
N2O
(tCO
2
e)
SF6
4
(tCO
2
e)
HCFCs
3
(tCO
2
e)
HFCs
3
(t CO
2
e)
PFCs
4
(tCO
2
e)
CO
2
(t)CH
4
(t)N
2
O (t)SF
6
4
(t)HCFCs
3
(t)HFCs
3
(t)PFCs
4
(t)
Scope 1: Direct emissions and removals
Diesel - Stationary 139.54 139.08 0.16 0.30 - - - - 139.08 0.0057 0.0011 - - - -
Diesel - Transport 1,070.48 1,066.92 1.23 2.33 - - - - 1,066.92 0.0440 0.0088 - - - -
Petrol 125.59 120.30 1.61 3.69 - - - - 120.30 0.0574 0.0139 - - - -
LPG - Mobile 637.10 635.40 1.43 0.27 - - - - 635.40 0.0509 0.0010 - - - -
R-410A 125.16 - - - - - 125.16 - - - - - - 0.0630 -
R-22 (HCFC-22) 128.48 - - - - 128.48 - - - - - - 0.0730 - -
R-32 (HFC-32) 14.22 - - - - - 14.22 - - - - - - 0.0210 -
R-407C 68.22 - - - - - 68.22 - - - - - - 0.0420 -
R-438A 0.00 - - - - - 0.00 - - - - - - 0.0000 -
Total Scope 12,308.791,961.69 4.43 6.59 0.00 128.48 207.60 0.00 1,961.69 0.1580 0.0249 0.0000 0.0730 0.1260 0.0000
Scope 2: Indirect emissions from imported energy (Location-based)
Purchased Electricity 4,922.30 4,742.20 172.81 7.29 - - - - 4,742.20 5.7989 0.0267 - - - -
Total Scope 2 4,922.30 4,742.20 172.81 7.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4,742.20 5.7989 0.0267 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Total (Scope 1 + 2) 7,231.08 6,703.89 177.23 13.88 0.00 128.48 207.60 0.00 6,703.89 5.9569 0.0516 0.0000 0.0730 0.1260 0.0000
1. Organisational boundary The inventory covers all operations within the Group’s organisational boundary, including our sourcing hubs in China, India and Bangladesh.
2. Emission factors and global warming potentials Unless otherwise stated, calculations use the New Zealand Ministry for the Environment 2026 Emissions Factors Workbook and IPCC AR5 100-year Global Warming Potentials.
Emission factors are presented in rounded form; calculations use unrounded values, so component figures may not sum exactly to reported totals. Figures are presented to two decimal places for emissions and carbon dioxide mass,
and four decimal places for other greenhouse gas masses. The Group does not combust biomass or biofuels, and no biogenic CO
2
emissions have been identified for the reporting period.
3. Refrigerants Refrigerant emissions are calculated from actual leakage and top-up data reported by our maintenance contractors. R-22 (HCFC-22) is a hydrochlorofluorocarbon regulated under the Montreal Protocol rather than a
Kyoto Protocol gas; it is reported in a separate HCFC column and is included in the Scope 1 total above. R-438A remains in use, but no leakage was recorded during FY26.
4. Excluded greenhouse gases No emissions of sulphur hexafluoride (SF
6
), perfluorocarbons (PFCs) or nitrogen trifluoride (NF
3
) were identified during the reporting period.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202650
Appendices
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
GRI Disclosures
Table 4: FY26 GHG and GWP Emissions Sources Excluded
GHG Protocol Category
Number
GHG Protocol Category Name Full or Partial Exclusions of GHG Emissions and Rationale
Scope 1 Direct emissions No notable exclusions from the FY26 inventory.
Biogenic Emissions
The Group does not combust biomass or biofuels, and no biogenic CO
2
emissions have been identified for the reporting period.
Scope 2Indirect emissions associated with the purchase of
electricity
No notable exclusions from the FY26 inventory.
Scope 3 Upstream Emissions
1 Purchased goods & services Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work is underway to determine these emissions.
2 Capital goods (e.g. plant, property & equipment). Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work is underway to determine these emissions.
3 Fuel- and Energy-related activities Emissions from company fleet EV home charging are currently excluded due to limited access to reliable and consistent data across users. We
expect this to be immaterial.
4Upstream Transportation & DistributionNotable exclusions:
• Reverse logistics of empty containers and trucks once the product has been delivered to one of our sites.
• Inter-store transfers for The Warehouse, Warehouse Stationery and Noel Leeming.
• Emissions from unloading containers at the Ports of Auckland.
• We are aware that some stores and the Store Support Office arrange their own courier services from time to time, and we have limited visibility
over these emissions.
• International freight outside our main freight-forwarding arrangements is excluded and considered immaterial. Work is underway with our
suppliers and internal teams to further improve freight data quality and completeness.
• Freight to and from our overseas sourcing hubs and ChocolateWorks, our joint venture chocolate factory, that sits under the Group has been
excluded due to data quality issues or missing datasets. Work is underway to capture this data.
5 Waste Generated in Operations Waste from overseas sourcing hub has also been excluded due to data quality or completeness issues. Work is underway to capture this data.
6 Business Travel No notable exclusions from the FY26 inventory.
7 Employee commuting Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work has started to determine these emissions.
8 Upstream leased Assets At some leased sites, landlords control HVAC systems and other energy sources, including diesel used for sprinkler pumps. Associated emissions
are currently excluded from our inventory. Electricity used in landlord-controlled shared spaces, such as car parks and mall corridors, is also
excluded. We do not control this consumption and, in most cases, it is bundled with other occupancy charges, meaning consumption data is not
available. Work has started to determine these emissions.
Scope 3 Downstream Emissions
9 Downstream freight We do not include courier emissions from sales made by Marketplace merchants through our online platforms, as we are not the seller of record
and do not own, store, or dispatch these products. These emissions fall within the value chains of the third-party sellers. Some emissions were
incorrectly included in our FY23 inventory in relation to orders we fulfilled on behalf of third-party merchants. These emissions have been removed
from our restated inventory. Emissions associated with operating the platform itself (e.g. outsourced hosting or cloud services) would typically fall
under Scope 3, Category 1 or 2, but are currently excluded (see above).
There is a gap with store-to-store freight not being recorded accurately. Work is underway to improve the capture of this data.
10 Processing of sold products Not applicable.
11 Use of sold products Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work is underway to determine these emissions.
12 End-of-life of sold products Full exclusion from inventory. Reliable calculation of emissions not available. Work is underway to determine these emissions.
13 Downstream leased assets Not applicable in FY26.
14 Franchises Not applicable.
15 Investments Not applicable.
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202651
Appendices
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
GRI Disclosures
Appendix 2 – Initiatives and Associations
Listed below are the external economic, environmental or social initiatives to which the Group subscribes, and the main associations and national or international advocacy
organisations of which the Group is a member.
Area Initiatives Association
Environmental• Climate Leaders Coalition
• NZ Soft Plastics Recycling Scheme
• TechCollect NZ
• Retail NZ Sustainability Working Group
• Sustainable Business Council (SBC)
• Waste Management Institute New Zealand Incorporated (WasteMINZ)
• The Packaging Forum
Human Resource• UN Women Aotearoa NZ• HRNZ
• Rainbow Tick (Toitū Takatāpui)
Product Sourcing and Development • Australasian Recycling Label (ARL)
• Forest Stewardship Council
• Rainforest Alliance
• Cruelty Free International
• New Zealand Business Round Table in China (NZBRiC)
• Australian Packaging Covenant Organisation (APCO)
• Better Cotton Initiative
Other • Vocational Education with Services Workforce Development Council (WDC)
• Vocational Education training through Te Pukenga
• Applied Business Management Project, AUT
• Seniors@Work
• Retail NZ
• NZ Marketing Association
The Warehouse Group | Sustainability Report 202652
Appendices
Our Approach
to Sustainability
IntroductionOur PeopleOur
Relationships
Our Climate
Transition and
Emissions
Our Approach to
Sustainability Governance
and Risk Management
GRI Disclosures
,1'(3(1'(17$6685$1&(5(3257
To the Stakeholders of The Warehouse Group Limited (“TWG”)
/LPLWHG$VVXUDQFH&RQFOXVLRQ
%DVHGRQWKHSURFHGXUHVZHKDYHSHUIRUPHGDQGWKHHYLGHQFHZHKDYHREWDLQHGQRWKLQJKDV
FRPHWRRXUDWWHQWLRQWKDWFDXVHVXVWREHOLHYHWKDWWKHHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQHQHUJ\LQWHQVLW\
Scope 1, 2 and 3 greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and waste disclosures (“Subject Matter
Information”), including the associated methodologies, assumptions, and estimation uncertainty
ZLWKLQWKHVFRSHRIRXUOLPLWHGDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWDVGLVFORVHGLQ7:*6XVWDLQDELOLW\5HSRUW
2026 (“the Report”) IRUWKHSHULRGRI $XJXVWWR $XJXVWDUHQRWIDLUO\SUHVHQWHGDQG
SUHSDUHGLQDOOPDWHULDOUHVSHFWVLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH5HSRUWLQJ&ULWHULD
6FRSHRIWKH$VVXUDQFH(QJDJHPHQW
7KHVFRSHRIDVVXUDQFHZDVOLPLWHGWRWKH6XEMHFW0DWWHU,QIRUPDWLRQUHODWLQJWRTWG’sRSHUDWLQJ
DVVHWVDVOLVWHGLQTable 1: “The Warehouse Group FY26 Organisational Boundary”RIWKH 5HSRUW
IRUWKHSHULRGRI $XJXVWWR$XJXVW
2XUDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWGLGQRWH[WHQGWRDQ\RWKHULQIRUPDWLRQLQFOXGHGLQWKH5HSRUWQRUWR
LQIRUPDWLRQUHODWLQJWRSULRUUHSRUWLQJSHULRGV:HKDYHQRWSHUIRUPHGDQ\SURFHGXUHVRQVXFK
LQIRUPDWLRQDQGDFFRUGLQJO\GRQRWH[SUHVVDFRQFOXVLRQWKHUHRQ
,QKHUHQW8QFHUWDLQW\LQSUHSDULQJ*+*GLVFORVXUHV
7KH*+*TXDQWLILFDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWRLQKHUHQWXQFHUWDLQW\GXHWRLQFRPSOHWHVFLHQWLILFNQRZOHGJH
XQGHUO\LQJ WKH GHWHUPLQDWLRQ RI HPLVVLRQ IDFWRUV DQG WKH PHWKRGRORJLHV XVHG WR FRQYHUW DQG
DJJUHJDWHGLIIHUHQWJUHHQKRXVHJDVHVLQWRDFRPPRQPHWULFHJ&2₂HTXLYDOHQW$GGLWLRQDO
XQFHUWDLQW\DULVHVIURPWKHXVHRIDVVXPSWLRQVDQGHVWLPDWLRQWHFKQLTXHVUHTXLUHGWRFDOFXODWH
HPLVVLRQV&RQVHTXHQWO\UHSRUWHGJUHHQKRXVHJDVHPLVVLRQVVKRXOGEHLQWHUSUHWHGLQWKHFRQWH[W
RIWKHVHLQKHUHQWVFLHQWLILFDQGHVWLPDWLRQXQFHUWDLQWLHV
TWG’s Responsibilities
0DQDJHPHQWRI7:* ZDVUHVSRQVLEOHIRU
3UHSDULQJ DQG SUHVHQWLQJ WKH 6XEMHFW 0DWWHU ,QIRUPDWLRQ LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK WKH
5HSRUWLQJ&ULWHULD
(VWDEOLVKLQJDQGPDLQWDLQLQJDSSURSULDWHLQWHUQDOFRQWUROVWRHQDEOHWKHSUHSDUDWLRQRI
LQIRUPDWLRQIUHHIURPPDWHULDOPLVVWDWHPHQWZKHWKHUGXHWRIUDXGRUHUURU
6HOHFWLQJDQGDSSO\LQJDSSURSULDWHPHWKRGVDVVXPSWLRQVDQGHVWLPDWHV
3URYLGLQJXVZLWKDOOUHOHYDQWLQIRUPDWLRQDQGDFFHVVQHFHVVDU\WRSHUIRUPWKHDVVXUDQFH
HQJDJHPHQW
2XU5HVSRQVLELOLWLHV
Bureau Veritas Australia Pty Ltd (“Bureau Veritas”) was responsible for:
3ODQQLQJDQGSHUIRUPLQJWKHDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWWRREWDLQOLPLWHGDVVXUDQFHRYHUWKH
6XEMHFW0DWWHU,QIRUPDWLRQ
2EWDLQLQJ VXIILFLHQW DQG DSSURSULDWH HYLGHQFH RQ ZKLFK WR EDVH RXU DVVXUDQFH
FRQFOXVLRQV
)RUPLQJDQLQGHSHQGHQWFRQFOXVLRQEDVHGRQWKHSURFHGXUHVSHUIRUPHGDQGHYLGHQFH
REWDLQHG
5HSRUWLQJRXUDVVXUDQFHFRQFOXVLRQVWRWKH'LUHFWRUVRI7:*
%XUHDX 9HULWDV ZDV QRW LQYROYHG LQ WKH SUHSDUDWLRQ RI WKH5HSRUW :H KDYH PDLQWDLQHG RXU
LQGHSHQGHQFHDQGSHUIRUPHGWKHHQJDJHPHQWLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHUHOHYDQWHWKLFDOUHTXLUHPHQWV
DSSOLFDEOHWRDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWV
6XEMHFW0DWWHU
,QIRUPDWLRQ
3DJH
UHIHUHQFH
5HSRUWLQJ&ULWHULD
(QHUJ\&RQVXPSWLRQZLWKLQWKH
2UJDQLVDWLRQ
S*5,H(QHUJ\
(QHUJ\LQWHQVLW\S*5,D(QHUJ\
'LUHFW6FRSH*+*HPLVVLRQVSDQG
*5,(PLVVLRQV
DQG
*+*3URWRFRO&RUSRUDWH
$FFRXQWLQJDQG5HSRUWLQJ
6WDQGDUG5HYLVHG(GLWLRQ
(QHUJ\LQGLUHFW6FRSH*+*HPLVVLRQVSDQG
2WKHULQGLUHFW6FRSH*+*
HPLVVLRQV
S
5HGXFWLRQRI*+*HPLVVLRQVS*5,(PLVVLRQV
:DVWHJHQHUDWHGS*5,:DVWH
:DVWHGLYHUWHGIURPGLVSRVDOS
*5,DDQGF:DVWH
:DVWHGLYHUWHGWRGLVSRVDOS
*5,DDQGF:DVWH
Appendix 3 – Independent Limited Assurance Report
,1'(3(1'(17$6685$1&(5(3257
To the Stakeholders of The Warehouse Group Limited (“TWG”)
/LPLWHG$VVXUDQFH&RQFOXVLRQ
%DVHGRQWKHSURFHGXUHVZHKDYHSHUIRUPHGDQGWKHHYLGHQFHZHKDYHREWDLQHGQRWKLQJKDV
FRPHWRRXUDWWHQWLRQWKDWFDXVHVXVWREHOLHYHWKDWWKHHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQHQHUJ\LQWHQVLW\
Scope 1, 2 and 3 greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and waste disclosures (“Subject Matter
Information”), including the associated methodologies, assumptions, and estimation uncertainty
ZLWKLQWKHVFRSHRIRXUOLPLWHGDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWDVGLVFORVHGLQ7:*6XVWDLQDELOLW\5HSRUW
2026 (“the Report”) IRUWKHSHULRGRI$XJXVWWR$XJXVWDUHQRWIDLUO\SUHVHQWHGDQG
SUHSDUHGLQDOOPDWHULDOUHVSHFWVLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH5HSRUWLQJ&ULWHULD
6FRSHRIWKH$VVXUDQFH(QJDJHPHQW
7KHVFRSHRIDVVXUDQFHZDVOLPLWHGWRWKH6XEMHFW0DWWHU,QIRUPDWLRQUHODWLQJWRTWG’sRSHUDWLQJ
DVVHWVDVOLVWHGLQTable 1: “The Warehouse Group FY26 Organisational Boundary”RIWKH5HSRUW
IRUWKHSHULRGRI$XJXVWWR$XJXVW
2XUDVVXUDQFHHQJDJHPHQWGLGQRWH[WHQGWRDQ\RWKHULQIRUPDWLRQLQFOXGHGLQWKH5HSRUWQRUWR
LQIRUPDWLRQUHODWLQJWRSULRUUHSRUWLQJSHULRGV:HKDYHQRWSHUIRUPHGDQ\SURFHGXUHVRQVXFK
LQIRUPDWLRQDQGDFFRUGLQJO\GRQRWH[SUHVVDFRQFOXVLRQWKHUHRQ
,QKHUHQW8QFHUWDLQW\LQSUHSDULQJ*+*GLVFORVXUHV
7KH*+*TXDQWLILFDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWRLQKHUHQWXQFHUWDLQW\GXHWRLQFRPSOHWHVFLHQWLILFNQRZOHGJH
XQGHUO\LQJ WKH GHWHUPLQDWLRQ RI HPLVVLRQ IDFWRUV DQG WKH PHWKRGRORJLHV XVHG WR FRQYHUW DQG
DJJUHJDWHGLIIHUHQWJUHHQKRXVHJDVHVLQWRDFRPPRQPHWULFHJ&2₂HTXLYDOHQW$GGLWLRQDO
XQFHUWDLQW\DULVHVIURPWKHXVHRIDVVXPSWLRQVDQGHVWLPDWLRQWHFKQLTXHVUHTXLUHGWRFDOFXODWH
HPLVVLRQV&RQVHTXHQWO\UHSRUWHGJUHHQKRXVHJDVHPLVVLRQVVKRXOGEHLQWHUSUHWHGLQWKHFRQWH[W
RIWKHVHLQKHUHQWVFLHQWLILFDQGHVWLPDWLRQXQFHUWDLQWLHV
TWG’s Responsib
[TRUNCATED]
Data sourced from publicly available filings. Our datasets may not be complete. Automated analysis can produce errors. If you believe any data on this page is incorrect, please contact us at hello@nzxplorer.co.nz. For informational purposes only. Not investment advice.